JP7088738B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined prize according to a display result of a variable display unit capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be individually identified.

As a slot machine of this type, it is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player until the number of remaining games becomes 0, and when a specific state is reached during the advantageous state, "HOLD" is displayed in the vicinity of the number of remaining games, and the rest. It has been proposed that the update of the number of games is stopped (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-7423

There is room for improvement in the configuration capable of stopping the update of the remaining amount in the advantageous state, such as the slot machine described in Patent Document 1.

It is an object of the present invention to provide a slot machine improved with respect to a hold state that does not reduce an advantageous amount of remaining amount.

The slot machine according to claim 1 is
It is equipped with variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variablely display multiple types of identification information (designs) that can be identified by each.
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
An advantageous state control means (main control unit 41) that controls an advantageous state (AT state) that is advantageous for the player, and
Remaining amount reducing means (subtraction processing of the number of navigation games) capable of reducing the remaining amount of the advantageous amount (number of navigation games) by the occurrence of a predetermined event in the advantageous state (winning of the navigation target combination).
An advantageous state ending means for terminating the advantageous state when the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is exhausted,
A hold state control means (hold control) that controls a hold state (hold state) in which the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is not reduced by the remaining amount reducing means even if a predetermined event occurs in the advantageous state.
A remaining amount increase determining means for determining whether or not to increase the remaining amount of the advantageous amount in the advantageous state,
When the remaining amount increasing determining means determines that the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is to be increased, the remaining amount increasing means for increasing the remaining amount of the advantageous amount and the remaining amount increasing means.
Equipped with
In the hold state, the remaining amount increasing means does not reduce the remaining amount of the advantageous amount, and the remaining amount increasing determining means determines that the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is increased. In the first hold state (first hold state) in which the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is not increased, the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is not reduced by the remaining amount reducing means , and the remaining amount increasing determining means is used. A second hold state (second hold state) in which the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is determined to be increased and the remaining amount of the advantageous amount may be increased by the remaining amount increasing means is included.
In the second hold state, it is possible to execute a privilege suggestion effect suggesting that a privilege related to an increase in the remaining amount of the advantageous amount may be given.
Even in the first hold state, the privilege suggestion effect can be executed.
It is characterized in that it shifts to a common state (non-hold state) after the end of the first hold state and after the end of the second hold state.
According to this feature, in an advantageous state in which the remaining amount of the advantageous amount decreases when a predetermined event occurs and ends when the remaining amount of the advantageous amount disappears, even if a predetermined event occurs in the advantageous state, the advantageous amount It may be controlled to a hold state in which the remaining amount does not decrease, and it is controlled to a plurality of types of hold states including a first hold state and a second hold state. Can be enhanced. In addition, both when controlled to the first hold state and when controlled to the second hold state, the state shifts to a common state after the end, so that it is easy to recognize that the hold state has ended. Can be done.

The slot machine of means 1 is
It is equipped with variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variablely display multiple types of identification information (designs) that can be identified by each.
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
An advantageous state control means (main control unit 41) that controls an advantageous state (AT state) that is advantageous for the player, and
Remaining amount reducing means (subtraction processing of the number of navigation games) capable of reducing the remaining amount of the advantageous amount (number of navigation games) by the occurrence of a predetermined event in the advantageous state (winning of the navigation target combination).
The advantageous state ending means (processing related to the payout state) that terminates the advantageous state when the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is exhausted (the remaining number of navigation games becomes 0), and
A hold state control means (hold control) that controls a hold state (hold state) that does not reduce the remaining amount of the advantageous amount (number of navigation games) even if a predetermined event occurs in the advantageous state.
Equipped with
The hold state is characterized by including a first hold state (first hold state) and a second hold state (second hold state).
According to this feature, in an advantageous state in which the remaining amount of the advantageous amount decreases when a predetermined event occurs and ends when the remaining amount of the advantageous amount disappears, even if a predetermined event occurs in the advantageous state, the advantageous amount It may be controlled to a hold state in which the remaining amount does not decrease, and it is controlled to a plurality of types of hold states including a first hold state and a second hold state. Can be enhanced.

In the means 1, when a predetermined event occurs in the advantageous state, the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is reduced, and when the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is exhausted, the advantageous state is terminated, for example, a numerical value is subtracted. , The advantageous state may end when it becomes 0, or the advantageous state may end when the numerical value becomes the default value by adding the numerical values so that the remaining number up to the specified number decreases.
Further, the hold state in which the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is not reduced even if a predetermined event occurs in the advantageous state in the means 1 may be configured so that the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is not updated in the hold state. By increasing the remaining amount of the above amount by the amount corresponding to the hold state, the remaining amount of the advantageous amount may not be substantially reduced.

The slot machine of the means 2 is the slot machine according to the means 1.
The advantageous section control means (main control unit 41) that controls the advantageous section that can be controlled to the advantageous state, and
A first value updating means for updating the first value (number of games in the advantageous section) in the advantageous section,
A second value updating means for updating the second value (net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section) in the advantageous section,
The first end condition (end condition 1) established when the first value reaches the first specified value in the advantageous section (the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games), or the second value is the second. 2 When any one of the second end conditions (end condition 2) that is satisfied by reaching the specified value (the net increase number exceeds 2388) is satisfied, the advantageous section ending means for ending the advantageous section. ,
When the first value reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games) before reaching the first specified value, the second predetermined value (2088 sheets) before the second value reaches the second specified value. ) Is reached, the advance notification execution means (sub-control unit 91) that can execute common advance notification (advanced section end notification) to notify that the end condition is about to be satisfied, and
Equipped with
The common advance notification includes both information regarding the first end condition (the number of games remaining up to the upper limit of the number of advantageous section games) and information regarding the second end condition (the number of remaining games up to the specified number of net increases). It is characterized by including notification.
According to this feature, the first end condition established when the first value updated in the advantageous section reaches the first specified value or the second value updated in the advantageous section reaches the second specified value. Even if one of the second end conditions satisfied in is not satisfied, the advantageous section ends when the other is satisfied, so that it is possible to prevent excessive advantage by being controlled by the advantageous section. In addition, both when the first value reaches the first predetermined value before reaching the first specified value and when the second value reaches the second predetermined value before reaching the second specified value. Since the common advance notification that the end condition is about to be satisfied is executed, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from being suddenly ended when the first end condition or the second end condition is satisfied. At this time, since the common advance notification includes both the information regarding the first end condition and the information regarding the second end condition, even if it is a common advance notification, either the first end condition or the second end condition is included. It is possible to recognize in advance that the advantageous section ends when the above is established.

The first termination condition satisfied when the first value reaches the first specified value in the means 2 may be satisfied when the first value is equal to or more than the first specified value, or the first value. May be established when the value immediately before reaching the first specified value is exceeded. Similarly, the second end condition that is satisfied when the second value reaches the second specified value may be satisfied when the second value is equal to or more than the second specified value, and the second value is the second. It may be established when the value immediately before reaching the specified value is exceeded.
Further, in the means 2, the advance notification executing means may execute common advance notification when the first value becomes the first predetermined value or more, and the first value reaches the first predetermined value. A common advance notification may be executed when the value immediately before is exceeded. Similarly, the advance notification executing means may execute common advance notification when the second value becomes the second predetermined value or more, or the value immediately before the second value reaches the second predetermined value. It may be the one that executes common advance notification when the number exceeds.

The slot machine of means 3 is the slot machine according to means 1 or 2.
The first hold state is a state in which the remaining amount of the advantageous amount (the number of navigation games) does not decrease and the remaining amount of the advantageous amount does not increase.
The second hold state is characterized in that the remaining amount of the advantageous amount (number of navigation games) does not decrease and the remaining amount of the advantageous amount can be increased.
According to this feature, in the second hold state, not only the remaining amount of the advantageous amount does not decrease but also can be increased, so that it is possible to further enhance the interest of having the first hold state and the second hold state.

The slot machine of the means 4 is the slot machine according to the means 3.
The second hold state is characterized in that the remaining amount of the advantageous amount (number of navigation games) can be increased when the predetermined event (winning of the navigation target combination) occurs.
According to this feature, the remaining amount of the advantageous amount can be increased by a predetermined event that causes the remaining amount of the advantageous amount to decrease if it is not controlled to the hold state, so that the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is controlled to the second hold state. It is possible to further enhance the interest of this.

The slot machine of the means 5 is the slot machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4.
The hold state suggestion means (hold effect) that suggests that the hold state is controlled, and the hold state suggestion means.
A remaining amount display means (image of the number of remaining navigation games) for displaying the remaining amount of the advantageous amount (number of navigation games) in the advantageous state (AT state), and
Equipped with
When the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is reduced by the remaining amount reducing means (subtraction processing of the number of navigation games), the remaining amount display means also reduces the display of the remaining amount of the advantageous amount (image of the number of remaining navigation games). Update as
The hold state suggestion means (hold effect) is
The first hold state suggestion means (first hold effect) that suggests that the hold state is controlled in the first hold state (first hold state), and
A second hold state suggestion means (second hold effect) that suggests that the hold state is controlled in the second hold state (second hold state), and
Including
The remaining amount display is both when it suggests that the first hold state suggesting means is controlled to the hold state and when it suggests that the second hold state suggesting means is controlled to the hold state. It is characterized in that the visibility of the remaining amount of the advantageous amount displayed by the means (remaining navigation game number image) is reduced.
According to this feature, in the hold state, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the remaining amount of the advantageous amount does not decrease by reducing the visibility of the remaining amount of the advantageous amount displayed by the remaining amount display means. In addition to being able to do so, the advantageous amount displayed by the remaining amount display means is displayed regardless of whether it is suggested that the hold state is controlled in the first hold state or that the hold state is controlled in the second hold state. Since the visibility of the remaining amount is reduced, it is possible to clearly notify that the remaining amount of the advantageous amount does not decrease regardless of which hold state is controlled.

In addition, in order to reduce the visibility of the remaining amount of the advantageous amount displayed by the remaining amount display means in the means 5, another display is superimposed on the remaining amount of the advantageous amount displayed by the remaining amount display means. This makes it possible to reduce the visibility, to make the color lighter, to reduce the visibility by lowering the transparency, and to display the advantageous amount of the remaining amount displayed by the remaining amount display means. The configuration to be erased is applicable.

The slot machine of the means 6 is the slot machine according to the means 5.
The first hold state suggestion means (first hold effect) is the advantage displayed by the remaining amount display means (remaining navigation game number image) over a period controlled by the first hold state (first hold state). Decreases the visibility of the remaining amount (number of navigation games),
The second hold state suggestion means (second hold effect) is the advantage displayed by the remaining amount display means (remaining navigation game number image) over a period controlled by the second hold state (second hold state). It is characterized by reducing the visibility of the remaining amount (number of navigation games).
According to this feature, it is possible to notify that the remaining amount of the advantageous amount does not decrease over the period when the hold state is controlled.

The slot machine of means 7 is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 6.
It is characterized in that it shifts to a common state (non-hold state) after the end of the first hold state (first hold state) and after the end of the second hold state (second hold state).
According to this feature, both when controlled to the first hold state and when controlled to the second hold state, the state shifts to the common state after the end, so that it can be understood that the hold state has ended. It can be easily recognized.

The common state in the means 7 may be a state in which the control content advantageous to the player in the advantageous state is common, or a state in which the effect mode is common.

The slot machine of the means 8 is the slot machine according to the means 7.
Equipped with a display means (liquid crystal display 51),
A background (background image A of AT effect (normal)) common to the display means is displayed both after the end of the first hold state (first hold state) and after the end of the second hold state (second hold state). It is characterized by letting it.
According to this feature, a common background is displayed regardless of whether the hold state is controlled to the first hold state or the second hold state, so that it is easier to recognize that the hold state has ended. Can be made to.

The slot machine of means 9 is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 8.
The advantageous section control means (main control unit 41) that controls the advantageous section that can be controlled to the advantageous state (AT state), and
A game number counting means (counter for advantageous section games) that counts the number of games controlled in the advantageous section (number of advantageous section games), and
An increasing value counting means (net increase number counter) for counting the increased value (net increase number of medals) in the advantageous section, and
Even if the remaining amount of the advantageous amount (number of navigation games) remains, it is established when the number of games counted by the game number counting means (number of advantageous section games) reaches the specified number of games (upper limit number of games). Either the first condition (end condition 1) or the second condition (end condition 2) that is established when the value (net increase in the number of medals) counted by the increased value counting means exceeds the specified value (specified number of sheets). A second advantageous state ending means (main control unit 41) that terminates the advantageous state when one of them is established,
Equipped with
The game number counting means counts the number of games controlled in the advantageous section even in the hold state (hold state).
The increased value counting means is characterized in that the increased value is counted in the advantageous section even in the hold state (hold state).
According to this feature, the advantageous state ends when the specified number of games is reached from the start of the advantageous section, and even if the specified number of games is not reached, even if the increased value in the advantageous section exceeds the default value. Since the advantageous state ends, it is possible to prevent the advantage from increasing excessively, and even when controlled to the hold state, the count of the number of games controlled in the advantageous section and the count of the increased value in the advantageous section are counted. Since it is performed, it is possible to prevent the advantage from being excessively increased even if it is controlled to the hold state.

The slot machine of the means 10 is the slot machine according to any one of the means 1 to 9.
Benefit suggestion means suggesting the possibility that a privilege (additional number of navigation games) advantageous to the player is given in the first hold state (first hold state) or the second hold state (second hold state). It is characterized by having an additional state transition possibility suggestion effect).
According to this feature, it can be expected that the privilege is given by being controlled to the first hold state or the second hold state.

The slot machine of means 11 is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 10.
It is equipped with a pre-determining means (internal lottery) that determines the display result that is allowed to be derived before the display result is derived.
When the determination result of the advance determination means (internal lottery) becomes a specific result (specific small winning combination 1, specific small winning combination 2), it is determined whether or not to control to the second hold state (second hold state). 2nd hold state determination means (additional state transition lottery) and
Equipped with
In the first hold state (first hold state), the privilege (addition of the number of navigation games) is not given, and in the second hold state (second hold state), the privilege may be given.
In the hold state control means (hold control), the determination result of the advance determination means (internal lottery) becomes a specific result (specific small winning combination 1, specific small winning combination 2), and the second hold state (second hold state). When it is determined to control to the second hold state, the determination result of the predetermining means becomes a specific result, and when it is not determined to control to the second hold state. Controlled to the first hold state (first hold state),
The privilege suggestion means (additional state transition possibility suggestion effect) is characterized in that it suggests the possibility that the privilege is given in the first hold state (first hold state).
According to this feature, even if the determination result of the prior determination means is controlled to the first hold state when the determination result becomes a specific result and it is suggested that the determination result may be controlled to the second hold state in which the privilege can be granted. In the meantime, it is suggested that the privilege may be given by the privilege suggesting means, so that the expectation that the privilege is given can be increased even in such a case.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination subject to an internal lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of the game auxiliary display. It is a figure for demonstrating the execution mode of a navigation notification and a navigation effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the game section. It is a figure for demonstrating advantageous section notification and internal suggestion. It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of the game assist indicator in an error state and a setting confirmation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the resumption order of the advantageous section notification and the navigation notification when the power supply is restarted after the power supply to the slot machine is stopped during the execution of the advantageous section notification and the navigation notification. It is a flow diagram which shows the control content of the main processing performed by the main control unit. It is a flow diagram which shows the control content of the game start waiting process performed by the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the ball ejection control process performed by a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the AT state management processing performed by the main control unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the change example of the net increase number counter value. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the medal payout process performed by a main control unit. It is a flow diagram which shows the control content of the processing at the time of a re-game operation performed by a main control unit. It is a flow diagram which shows the control content of a timer interrupt process performed by a main control part. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the display mode of a game assist display, etc. at the start of advantageous section notification. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the display mode of a game assist display etc. at the end of advantageous section notification. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the display mode of a game assist display etc. at the end of advantageous section notification. It is a figure for demonstrating the control state about AT. It is a figure for demonstrating the AT effect (normal) performed by a sub-control unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the ending suggestion effect performed by a sub-control unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the advance notice about the AT effect (ending) and the end of an advantageous section performed by a sub-control unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of a game and a production. It is a figure for demonstrating the start timing and the end timing of advance notification. It is a figure for demonstrating the start timing and the end timing of advance notification. It is a figure for demonstrating the weak hold effect performed by a sub-control unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the strong hold effect performed by a sub-control unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold effect performed by a sub-control unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold effect, the addition state effect, and the addition effect performed by a sub-control unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the execution timing of the 1st hold effect performed by a sub-control unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the execution timing of the 2nd hold effect performed by a sub-control unit.

An embodiment for carrying out the slot machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

Examples of the slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is composed of a housing 1a having an open front surface and a front door 1b rotatably pivotally supported at a side end of the housing 1a. There is. Inside the slot machine 1, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter, left reel, middle reel, and right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols that can be distinguished from each other are arranged in the same number in a predetermined order are horizontally arranged. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged side by side in the see-through window 3 provided in the substantially center of the front of the slot machine 1. Each is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages and is arranged so that it can be seen from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, each reel has a plurality of types of symbols (“red 7”, “blue 7”, “white 7”, “BAR”, “watermelon”, “cherry a” that can be identified by each reel. , "Cherry b", "Bell", "Replay", "Plum") are arranged in a predetermined order.

Although the configuration using three reels is illustrated in this embodiment, a configuration using only one reel, a configuration using two reels, and a configuration using four or more reels may be used. .. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display unit for variably displaying the symbols by the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is configured, but the variable display unit may be other than the reel, for example, a plurality of symbols on the outer peripheral surface. The design may be changed and displayed by moving the belt on which the reels are arranged. Further, in this embodiment, the variable display unit is configured by a physical reel, but the variable display unit may be configured by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

As shown in FIG. 1, on the front of the slot machine 1, there are a medal insertion section 4 in which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 in which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player-owned game value). ) Is used as the MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting the maximum number of medals among the specified number of medals (3 in this embodiment) determined according to the gaming state within the range, as medals. Settlement switch 10, which is operated when the medals used for setting the stored medals and the number of bets are settled (the medals used for setting the credits and the number of bets are returned), and which is operated when starting the game. The stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, which are operated when the rotations of the start switch 7, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, are provided so as to be operable by the player.

On the front of the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 1, a credit display 11 displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, and the contents when an error occurs are shown. Game auxiliary display 12, game auxiliary display 12, which displays an error code, operation information (navigation information) corresponding to the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, an advantageous section display indicating that the control is controlled in an advantageous section, etc. 1BETLED14 that notifies by lighting that 1 is set, 2BETLED15 that notifies that the number of bets is 2 by lighting, 3BETLED16 that notifies by lighting that 3 bets are set, and the insertion of medals The input request LED 17 that notifies the possible state by lighting, the start effective LED 18 that notifies that the game start operation by operating the start switch 7 is effective, and the wait (because a certain period has not passed since the previous game start). The game display unit 13 provided with a waiting LED 19 for notifying by lighting that the reel is in the process of waiting for the start of rotation, and a replay LED 20 for notifying that the replay game is in progress by lighting. It is provided. Further, a liquid crystal display 51 capable of displaying an image or the like is provided on the front surface of the slot machine 1.

Inside the MAXBET switch 6, a BET switch effective LED21 (see FIG. 3) for notifying by lighting that the setting operation of the bet number by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is effective is provided, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, Inside the 8R, there are left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 3) that notify by lighting that the operation of stopping the reel by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective. It is provided.

Inside the slot machine 1, there is a reset switch 23 that detects a reset operation for canceling an error state from the outside of the slot machine 1 by a predetermined key operation, and at that time while changing the set value or checking the set value. Either the hopper tank side or the medal payout outlet 9 side, which will be described later, is provided inside the slot machine 1 so that the flow path of the medals inserted from the set value display 24 and the medal insertion unit 4 on which the set value is displayed is displayed. A medal selector (not shown) is provided having a flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to the medal, and a medal sensor 31 for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flowing down to the hopper tank side.

Further, inside the slot machine 1, the reel unit 34 for driving the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R described above according to the control signal from the main control unit 41, and the medal according to the control signal from the main control unit 41. A hopper unit 35 is provided for paying out the medals from the medal payout outlet 9.

Further, inside the slot machine 1, it functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and a reset switch for canceling an error state in a normal state, and will be described later in the setting change state. A reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing the set value of the winning probability (ball output rate) of the internal lottery is provided.

As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40 and an effect control board 90. The game control board 40 controls the game, and the effect control board 90 responds to the game state. The production is controlled.

The game control board 40 includes the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the input medal sensor 31, the reel sensor (not shown) of the reel unit 34, and the hopper. A payout sensor and a full tank sensor (not shown) of the unit 35, a setting key switch 37, and a reset / setting switch 38 are connected, and detection signals of these connected switches and the like are input.

Further, on the game control board 40, the above-mentioned credit display 11, game auxiliary display 12, 1 to 3 BETLED 14 to 16, input request LED 17, start effective LED 18, wait LED 19, replay LED 20, BET switch effective LED 21, left. , Middle, right stop effective LED 22L, 22C, 22R, set value display 24, flow path switching solenoid 30, reel unit 34, hopper unit 35 are connected, and these electric parts are mounted on the game control board 40. It is driven based on the control of the main control unit 41.

The game control board 40 is composed of a microcomputer provided with a main CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d, and is equipped with a main control unit 41 that controls the game.

A staging device such as the above-mentioned liquid crystal display 51, a speaker capable of outputting sound, and a reel LED (not shown) capable of illuminating predetermined positions of reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the rear side is connected to the staging control board 90. The output state of these effect devices can be controlled by the sub control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90. The sub control unit 91 receives a command transmitted from the main control unit 41 and performs various controls for performing the effect.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using the winning probability according to the set value in the lottery that affects the advantage to the player such as the internal lottery. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is.

In order to change the set value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 37. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed as a display value on the setting value display 24, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Move to the setting change state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated by 1 (when the setting value 6 is further operated, the setting value is changed to 1). return). Then, when the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is fixed as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the confirmed display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the game shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

The setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are provided inside the slot machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the front door 1b, which can be opened by a predetermined key operation, is opened. Of the clerk of the game store to be installed, only the clerk who possesses the predetermined key can operate it. In particular, since the setting key switch 37 requires further key operation, only the clerk who has the key for operating the setting key switch 37 can operate the setting key switch 37 among the clerk of the game store. Further, the reset switch 23 does not need to open the front door 1b, but requires a key operation using a predetermined key, so that only a store clerk who possesses the predetermined key can operate the reset switch 23. Further, the reset / setting switch 38 also functions as a reset switch for canceling the error state in the normal state.

When playing a game on the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, first, a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, or a MAXBET switch 6 is operated to set a bet number using credits. When a predetermined number of bets is set according to the game state, the predetermined winning lines LN (see FIG. 1, in this embodiment, are arranged horizontally in the middle of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R). It is set across the symbols), and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game can be started. If more than the maximum number of medals are inserted out of the specified number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount will be added to the credit. Further, in this embodiment, only one winning line is applied, but a plurality of winning lines may be applied.

When the start switch 7 is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously changed. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated while the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are rotated, stop control is performed for the corresponding reels 2L, 2C and 2R, and the rotation of the reel is performed. It is stopped, and the design of the reel is derived and displayed on the perspective window 3 as a display result.

In the stop control, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R corresponding to the operation is stopped within the maximum stop delay time (190 ms (millisecond) in this embodiment) from the time when the operation of each stop switch is performed. Is done. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated 80 times per minute, and 80 (rotation) x 21 (number of symbol frames per reel, for example, 21 frames) = 1680 frames of symbols are varied, so a predetermined maximum Until the stop delay time (190 ms) elapses, up to four frames of symbols can be drawn in. That is, in the stop control, one symbol from the symbol displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated and the symbols up to 4 frames ahead, for a total of 5 frames (retraction range). Can be selected and led to the reels 2L, 2R, 2R.

As a result, in the stop control, when the rotation is stopped by operating the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the winning combination won in the internal lottery described later is selected. If the constituent symbols are within the pull-in range from the symbol when the stop switch is operated to 4 frames ahead, the symbol is pulled onto the winning line LN to rotate the reel on which the stop switch is operated. On the other hand, if the symbols that make up the winning combination that has been won in the internal lottery are not within the drawing range, the symbols that make up the winning combination that has not been won in the internal lottery will be the winning line LN. It is possible to pull a symbol that does not constitute any winning combination onto the winning line LN so as not to stop upward, and control the stop switch to stop the rotation of the operated reel.

Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped, one game is ended, and the combination of the winning combination symbols predetermined on the winning line LN is stopped as the display result of each reel 2L, 2C and 2R. In that case, a prize is generated, and a number of medals determined according to the prize are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the number of credits reaches the upper limit (50 in this embodiment), the medals are directly paid out from the medal payout exit 9 (see FIG. 1). Further, when the combination of symbols accompanied by the transition of the gaming state stops on the winning line LN as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the combination of symbols is shifted to the gaming state according to the combination of symbols. ..

In this embodiment, the game starts when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, and the game ends when all the reels are stopped. In addition, one unit of control for executing the game (game control) starts when all the controls associated with the end of the previous game are completed, and when all the controls associated with the end of the game are completed. finish.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the type of winning combination (hereinafter referred to as winning combination) is determined according to the game state, and it is not necessary to set a small combination with medal payout and a bet number. There is a re-gaming role that enables the start of the next game, and a special role that involves a transition to a gaming state (special state) that is advantageous to the player. In the following, the small role and the replaying role are collectively referred to as the general role. In order for each winning combination determined according to the gaming state to be won, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag for the winning combination. In the internal lottery, whether or not the main control unit 41 allows the winning of each of the above-mentioned combinations is before the display results of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived (specifically, the specified number). When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected with the bet number set), it is determined by using a random number.

Of the winning flags for each combination, the winning flags for the small combination and the replaying combination are valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and are invalid in the next game, but the winning flag for the special combination is the relevant. It is valid until all the allowed combinations of combinations are available by the flag, and is invalid in the game where all the allowed combination of combinations are available. That is, once the winning flag of the special role is won, even if the combination of the winning combination permitted by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It has become.

Further, in the internal lottery, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode (for example, stop operation order, operation timing), it is more advantageous than the case where the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. A role and a replaying role (hereinafter, may be referred to as a navigation target role) can be won. The navigation target role may be, for example, a role that is more advantageous than the stop mode in which the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode and the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. Includes a combination in which, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined predetermined operation mode, the rate of stopping the advantageous stop mode is higher than that in the case where the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. Further, the advantageous stop mode includes not only a stop mode accompanied by the awarding of medals, but also a stop mode accompanied by a transition to an advantageous gaming state, a stop mode in which a transition to an unfavorable gaming state is avoided, and the like.

The main control unit 41 executes a navigation notification that notifies the navigation information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, which is advantageous for the player according to the internal lottery result, by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to control the assist time (AT), which is a possible notification period. The main control unit 41 starts controlling the AT and controls the AT by granting the right to be controlled by the AT to the player. Then, when the AT is controlled, by winning the navigation target combination, the navigation notification is executed, and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R (for example, the push order, which is advantageous for the player). The operation timing, etc.) is notified using the game auxiliary display 12, and a command that can specify an operation mode that is advantageous to the player is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, so that the operation mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display. The navigation effect to be notified is executed by using 51 or the like. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the operation mode notified by the navigation notification and the navigation effect, the navigation target winning combination won in the internal lottery can be reliably won.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes a game auxiliary display 12 capable of displaying the number of medals paid out, an error code, and navigation information, and the game auxiliary display 12 is used in controlling the navigation notification. Although it is configured to notify the navigation information, a configuration may be provided in which a dedicated display capable of displaying only the navigation information is provided and the navigation information is notified using the dedicated display in the control of the navigation notification.

[About the game status]
As shown in FIG. 4, the main control unit 41 can control the gaming state to any of non-internal, internal, and special states (BB general, RB). The gaming state is a state in which the type of the re-gaming combination to be drawn by the internal lottery and the probability that the re-gaming combination is won by the internal lottery are common. In this embodiment, the probability of winning the re-gaming combination differs depending on the gaming state in the non-internal middle, the internal middle, the BB general in the special state, and the RB in the special state. The probability of winning is uniform. In addition, the types of replaying roles that are subject to lottery by internal lottery in the internal are the same as those in non-internal, but the types of replaying roles that are subject to lottery by internal lottery in BB general and RB in a special state are Unlike the non-internal inside, the type of the replaying combination that is the target of the lottery by the internal lottery in the BB in the special state is different from the RB.

During non-internal, the winning of the special role (BB) has not been carried over. When the slot machine 1 is started in a state where a predetermined area of the RAM 41c for storing data related to the factory default state of the slot machine 1 and the gaming state is initialized, the slot machine 1 is first controlled in the non-internal state. .. In addition, it is controlled inside non-internally by ending the special state. Then, during the non-internal, the special role (BB) is won in the internal lottery in the non-internal game, and the special role is dropped and transferred to the inside. In addition, in a game in which a special role (BB) is won in an internal lottery, the special role (BB) wins a prize and the game ends when the game is transferred to a special state.

The predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the data related to the game state is stored is not initialized when the setting shift to the above-mentioned setting change state, and after the setting change state ends, the setting change state is reached. The game state before the start is inherited. That is, if it was controlled inside the non-internal state before the start of the setting change state, it is still controlled inside the non-internal state even after the end of the setting change state, and if it was controlled inside the inside before the start of the setting change state. Is still controlled internally even after the setting change state ends.

Further, in the non-internal manner, in the game within a predetermined period, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player, so that the payout rate of medals per game during the period can be increased. While exceeding 100%, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player, so that the medal payout rate per game during the period does not exceed 100%. There is. As will be described later, the payout rate of medals per game does not exceed 100% because the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is not notified inside the non-internal.

Inside, the winning of the special role (BB) has been carried over. It starts when a special role (BB) is won in an internal lottery in the non-internal.

Inside, in a game within a predetermined period, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player, so that the payout rate of medals per game during the period is 100%. On the other hand, since the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player, the medal payout rate per game during the period does not exceed 100%. During the period when the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is notified, the payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100%, while during the period when the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is not notified, the medal per game The payout rate does not exceed 100%. In addition, the probability that the small winning combination will be won in the internal lottery is the same as the probability that the small winning combination will be won in the internal lottery. The probability is set higher than in the non-internal, and the internal is in an advantageous state as compared with the non-internal.

The special state is a gaming state controlled by winning a special role (BB), which is started when the special role (BB) wins in a non-internal manner, and a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, during the special state). The total number of medals to be paid out exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 50). After the end of the special state, it will be transferred to the non-internal.

The special state includes BB general and RB as the game state, and in the special state, it is controlled to one of the game states until the game in which the above-mentioned predetermined end condition is satisfied.

In BB in general, the probability of winning a small winning combination in an internal lottery is the same as in non-internal and internal, but the probability of winning a special winning combination (RB) is high. It is started when a special role (BB) wins a prize in the inside and shifts to a special state, or when RB is terminated when the end condition of the special state is not satisfied. Then, in the BB general, the special combination (RB) is won by the internal lottery, and the symbol combination of the special combination (RB) is stopped at the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and the process is transferred to the RB.

In RB, the probability that a small winning combination will be won in an internal lottery is higher than in non-internal, internal, and BB in general. The special combination (RB) is won by an internal lottery in the general BB, and the symbol combination of the special combination (RB) is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Then, in the RB, at least one of a predetermined number of winnings (8 times in this embodiment) occurring in the RB or a predetermined number of games (12 games in this embodiment) being played in the RB. Is satisfied and the game is terminated, and the game is transferred to BB in general.

In BB in general, the probability that a special role (RB) will be won in an internal lottery is set higher than the probability that it will be won in non-internal and internal. In addition, the probability that the re-game combination will be won in the internal lottery is set to 0, and the probability that the re-game combination will be won in the non-internal area is assigned to the probability that the special role (RB) will be won in the general BB. ing. On the other hand, the probability that the small winning combination will be won in the internal lottery in the general BB is set to the same probability as in the non-internal and internal.

Further, in the general BB, the small winning combination is won in the internal lottery with the same probability as in the non-internal and internal, but as will be described later, it is not controlled in the advantageous section, and the operation mode that is advantageous for the player is notified. It is designed not to be done. In addition, the special role (RB) that can be won in BB in general is a role in which medals are not paid out in connection with the winning. As a result, the payout rate of medals in BB in general does not exceed 100%.

In RB, the probability that the small winning combination will be won in the internal lottery is higher than the probability that the small winning combination will be won in the non-internal and internal. In the RB, in the internal lottery, the number of medals (for example, one) smaller than the number of medals (for example, three) used to set the number of bets in one game is paid out with the winning of the first small winning combination (book). In the embodiment, the RB small and medium-sized winning combination 2) is the second small winning combination (in the present embodiment) in which a larger number of medals (for example, 8) than the number of medals used for setting the bet number in one game is paid out with the winning. Then, the winning probability (for example, about 3/4) is higher than the winning probability (for example, about 1/4) of the RB small and medium-sized combination 1), and the number of medals paid out per game in the RB is The expected value of (for example, 2.75) is less than the number of medals (for example, 3) used to set the number of bets in one game. Further, as will be described later, the operation mode is not controlled to the advantageous section, and the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is not notified. As a result, the medal payout rate does not exceed 100% in the RB. That is, in BB general and RB, the medal payout rate does not exceed 100%, and the medal payout rate in the special state does not exceed 100%. Further, in BB general and RB, it is not controlled to an advantageous section.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a special combination (BB) is won with a predetermined probability (for example, about 1 / 3.4) in the above-mentioned non-internal, and the special combination (BB) is transferred to the internal. In the inside, that is, in the state where the winning flag of the special role (BB) is carried over, if it is not controlled by the AT described later, the medal payout rate per game does not exceed 100%, but it becomes the AT. When controlled, the payout rate of medals per game is set to exceed 100%.

In addition, in the reel stop control, when the special combination and the small combination are won at the same time, the control is performed so that the small combination is prioritized and aligned, and all of them are subject to the internal lottery inside. In the small role of, the drawing range of the special role (BB) composition symbol and the drawing range of the small combination composition symbol overlap, and even if any small combination is won, the winning small combination composition symbol is the winning line. It will stop at LN. In addition, when the special role and the re-game combination are won at the same time, the control is performed so that the re-game combination is always aligned. That is, if a small role or a replaying combination is won in the inside, the special role (BB) is not won.

In addition, since one of the small roles or one of the replaying roles is always won inside the inside, the special role (BB) does not win once it is transferred to the inside, and it goes inside. After the transition, the inside will be maintained.

In the slot machine 1, since most of the games are controlled internally, it is assumed that the slot machine 1 is controlled internally, and medals are paid out according to the set value (1 to 6 in this embodiment). Whether or not to control the AT internally so that the rate becomes a value determined according to each set value, specifically, by setting the winning probability of the AT lottery described later, the set value is set. The corresponding medal payout rate is set.

In addition, since the medal payout rate is set according to the set value on the premise that it is controlled inside, the medal payout rate is as designed when the game is controlled to a game state other than inside. There is a possibility that it will deviate from the payout rate of, and it is preferable to control it internally as much as possible. Therefore, in this embodiment, the recommended operation mode recommended for the player and the operation mode for winning the special combination (BB) are different so that the player can easily move to the inside inside the non-inside. That is, as long as the player performs the stop operation in the recommended operation mode in the non-internal environment, the special combination (BB) does not win a prize.

In this way, when the special combination (BB) is won in the internal lottery and the symbol combination of the special combination (BB) is not derived, the main control unit 41 next wins the special combination (BB). It is possible to carry over after the game.

Further, the main control unit 41 controls the AT to notify the operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R which are advantageous for navigation notification in the inside where the winning of the special combination (BB) is carried over. It is possible to do so, and it is designed so that the payout rate of medals is appropriate in the inside.

As will be described later, in the non-internal and internal games, the advantageous section transition lottery will be performed by winning the advantageous section transition lottery target combination described later in the internal lottery, and the advantageous section transition lottery will be performed. By winning in, the game section described later may be transferred from the normal section to the advantageous section. On the other hand, in the special state of the gaming state, as will be described later, the winning section is not won in the advantageous section transition lottery, and the gaming section is not shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section.

In addition, the special state is, for example, a state in which the winning probability of a small winning combination is increased by an internal lottery for each specified number of games, which is shifted to a predetermined case and continues until the predetermined number of games is played. It may be in a state where it is played, or it may be in a state where the winning probability of a small winning combination is continuously increased by an internal lottery for each specified number of games, regardless of the random number value acquired in the internal lottery. It is a state in which a small winning combination is won, and it may be a state in which it is shifted to a predetermined case and ended by playing one game, or the winning probability of the small winning combination is increased by an internal lottery for each specified number of games. It may be a state in which the game is shifted to the reel on the condition that a predetermined combination of symbols is derived to the reel, and the game is ended when one game is played.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls to a special state by winning a special combination (BB) in the non-internal state, and in the BB general included in the special state, the special combination (BB) is selected by an internal lottery. RB) is elected and the special combination (RB) wins to control the RB. However, the special combination (RB) can be elected even in the internal lottery inside the non-internal area, and the special combination (RB) can be won. The special role (RB) that has been elected in the game may win a prize or may be controlled by the RB.

[About the lottery target role of the internal lottery]
The internal lottery target combination to be the lottery target in the internal lottery performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

The internal lottery target combination includes a plurality of internal lottery target combinations. Each internal lottery target combination includes one or more winning combinations, and when one internal lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery, the winning combination included in the internal lottery target combination is simultaneously won. ..

As shown in FIG. 5, the internal lottery target combinations include a special combination (BB), a special combination (RB), a push order small combination 1, a push order small combination 2, a push order small combination 3, and a push order small combination 4. Pushing order small winning combination 5, pushing order small winning combination 6 (hereinafter, pushing order small winning combination 1 to 6 may be collectively referred to as pushing order small winning combination), specific small winning combination 1, specific small winning combination 2, RB small and medium small winning combination 1, RB small and medium-sized role 2 and re-game role are included.

The special role (BB) is a role that involves the transition to the above-mentioned special state by winning a prize. The special role (BB) is subject to an internal lottery when the gaming state is controlled inside and outside, while when the gaming state is controlled inside and inside (BB general, RB). Not eligible for internal lottery.

The special role (RB) is a role that accompanies the transition to the above-mentioned RB by winning a prize. The special role (RB) is subject to an internal lottery when the gaming state is controlled by the general BB, while the internal lottery is controlled by the non-internal and internal, BB general, and RB game states. In BB general, the probability that a special role (RB) will be won in the internal lottery is when the gaming state is a state other than BB general (non-internal, internal, RB). The probability is higher than that of.

In this embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled in the non-internal and internal, the special combination (RB) is not subject to the internal lottery, and the gaming state shifts from the non-internal or internal to the RB. Although it is a configuration that is not played, the special role (RB) is subject to the lottery of the internal lottery even when the gaming state is controlled in the non-internal or internal, and the special role is in the non-internal and internal. (RB) may be won, and the symbol combination of the special combination (RB) is stopped on the reel, so that the gaming state can be shifted from non-internal or internal to RB.

The push order small combinations 1 to 6 are the push order small combinations by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in a predetermined operation mode (in this embodiment, the operation order) assigned to each push order small combination. Among the winning combinations included in the above, the increasing winning combination in which a larger number of medals than the number of bets are paid out wins a prize, while the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode. Among the winning roles included in the push order small winning combination, the reducing winning combination in which the number of medals less than the number of bets is paid out may be won, but none of the winning winning combination may be won. Therefore, when the push order small winning combination 1 to 6 is won, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out may be changed depending on whether or not the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the operation mode according to the type of winning combination. can.

When the push order small winning combinations 1 to 6 are won, the operation mode in which the increasing winning combination among the winning winning combinations included in the push order small winning combination can be won, that is, the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is the push order small winning combination. In role 1, the operation in the order of operation in which the left reel 2L is stopped first, the middle reel 2C is stopped second, and the right reel 2R is stopped third (hereinafter, may be referred to as a left middle right stop operation). In the push order small winning combination 2, the left reel 2L is stopped first, the right reel 2R is stopped second, and the middle reel 2C is stopped third (hereinafter, left and right). (Sometimes called a middle stop operation), and in the push order small combination 3, the middle reel 2C is stopped first, the left reel 2L is stopped second, and the right reel 2R is stopped third. In the push order small combination 4, the middle reel 2C is stopped first, the right reel 2R is stopped second, and the left reel 2L is stopped. It is an operation in the operation order to stop third (hereinafter, it may be called middle right left stop operation), and in the push order small winning combination 5, the right reel 2R is stopped first and the left reel 2L is second. It is an operation in the operation order of stopping and stopping the middle reel 2C third (hereinafter, may be referred to as a right / left middle stop operation), and in the push order small winning combination 6, the right reel 2R is stopped first. This is an operation in the order of operation in which the middle reel 2C is stopped second and the left reel 2L is stopped third (hereinafter, may be referred to as a right middle left stop operation).

Pushing order small winning combination 1 to 6 are subject to an internal lottery when the game state is controlled in non-internal, internal, or BB in general, and are in the internal lottery when the game state is controlled in any of these game states. It is designed to win with the same probability. On the other hand, the push order small winning combination 1 to 6 are not subject to the internal lottery when the gaming state is controlled by the RB.

The specific small winning combination 1 and the specific small winning combination 2 are combinations having a lower probability of being won in the internal lottery than other internal lottery target combinations. Further, the specific small winning combination 1 has a higher probability of being won in the internal lottery than the specific small winning combination 2. The specific small winning combination 1 and the specific small winning combination 2 are subject to an internal lottery when the gaming state is controlled by the non-internal middle, the internal middle, and the BB in general, and are internal when the gaming state is controlled by any of these gaming states. It is designed to win with the same probability in the lottery. Further, the specific small winning combination 1 and the specific small winning combination 2 are not subject to the internal lottery when the gaming state is controlled by the RB.

The RB small and medium-sized winning combination 1 and the RB small and medium-sized winning combination 2 are not subject to the internal lottery when the gaming state is non-internal or internal, and when the BB is generally controlled, and are internal only when the gaming state is controlled by the RB. It is subject to lottery.

The RB small and medium-sized winning combination 1 is a small winning combination in which a larger number of medals (8 in this embodiment) than the number of medals used for setting the bet number in one game is paid out with a winning, and is inside the RB. There is a 1/4 chance of winning a lottery. On the other hand, the RB small and medium-sized winning combination 2 is a small winning combination in which the number of medals smaller than the number of medals used for setting the bet number in one game (1 in this embodiment) is paid out as a result of winning. It is designed to win with a probability of about 3/4 in the internal lottery. As a result, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out per game in RB is 2.75, which is less than the number of medals used to set the number of bets in one game (3 in this embodiment), and is RB. The payout rate of the medals inside does not exceed 100%.

The re-game combination is subject to an internal lottery regardless of whether the gaming state is controlled inside or inside, and is controlled to either the non-internal or internal gaming state. Even when it is done, it is designed to win with the same probability in the internal lottery. Further, when the gaming state is BB general or RB, it is not subject to the internal lottery.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled inside, the above-mentioned small winning combination (pushing order small winning combination 1 to 6, specific small winning combination 1, specific small winning combination 2) and the above-mentioned small winning combination (pushing order small winning combination 1 to 6, specific small winning combination 2) and The probability that the re-gaming combination (re-gaming combination) will be won is that the increasing combination is won when all the push order small roles 1 to 6 are won, and the winning combination is won when all the specific small roles 1 and the specific small role 2 are won. It is obtained by subtracting the total number of medals used to set the number of bets in the specified period from the total number of medals paid out in the specified period when the small winning combination is won without fail. It is designed so that the average value per game (total number of medals) is a predetermined value (three in this embodiment).

In the internal lottery, the special role (BB), the special role (RB), the push order small role 1 to 6, the RB small and medium-sized role 1, the RB small and medium-sized role 2, and the re-game combination are in the slot machine 1. While there is a probability that there is no difference according to the set value, that is, a uniform probability regardless of the set value, the specific small winning combination 1 and the winning combination of the internal lottery targets are selected. The specific small winning combination 2 is designed to be won with a probability of having a difference depending on the set value set.

The main control unit 41 can perform an advantageous section lottery for determining whether or not to shift the game section described later to an advantageous section, triggered by the winning of a predetermined internal lottery target combination in the internal lottery. .. Hereinafter, the internal lottery target combination that triggers the advantageous section lottery may be referred to as an advantageous section transition lottery target combination. In the advantageous section transition lottery, regardless of which set value is set, if the advantageous section transition lottery target winning combination won in the internal lottery is the same combination, there is a uniform probability that the winning combination will be transferred to the advantageous section. The advantageous section transition lottery is held so as to be decided.

Among the internal lottery target combinations, the push order small winning combination 1 to 6, the specific small winning combination 1, the specific small winning combination 2, and the replaying combination are the advantageous section transition target winning combination. These advantageous section transition lottery target combinations are designed to win with the same probability in the internal lottery regardless of whether the gaming state is controlled to the non-internal or internal gaming state, and the gaming state is changed. The advantageous section transition lottery is performed with the combination that the winning probability of the internal lottery does not change regardless of whether it is controlled inside or outside the inside.

In addition, a combination that is not an internal lottery target combination in the inside (in the embodiment, a special role (BB), a special role (RB), an RB small and medium-sized role 1, RB small and medium-sized role 2), and a gaming state are non-internal and internal. The advantage section transition lottery is not performed, triggered by the role that the probability of winning in the internal lottery changes depending on which of the above is controlled.

The main control unit 41 performs an AT lottery for determining whether or not to control the above-mentioned AT, triggered by the winning of a predetermined internal lottery target combination in the internal lottery. Hereinafter, the internal lottery target combination that triggers the AT lottery may be referred to as an AT lottery target combination.

Of the internal lottery target roles, the push order small roles 1 to 6, the specific small role 1, the specific small role 2, and the replaying combination are AT lottery target roles. When the game section is controlled to be an advantageous section, the AT lottery is performed by winning any of these AT lottery target combinations in the internal lottery. In the AT lottery, regardless of which set value is set in the slot machine 1, if the AT lottery target winning combinations in the internal lottery are the same winning combination, it is determined that the AT will be controlled with a uniform probability. The lottery is to be held so that it will be played.

In addition, in the AT lottery that is held when the specific small winning combination 1 or the specific small winning combination 2 is won in the internal lottery, it is triggered by the winning of either the pushing order small winning combination 1 to 6 or the replaying combination. It has come to be decided to control AT with a higher probability than sometimes. Further, in the AT lottery held when the specific small winning combination 1 is won, it is decided to control the AT with a higher probability than when the specific small winning combination 2 is won. It has become like.

The probability that the advantageous section transition lottery target combination will be won in the internal lottery is a uniform probability regardless of the set value set in the slot machine 1, and the winning of the advantageous section transition lottery target combination will be an opportunity. In the advantageous section transition lottery to be performed, the lottery may be performed with a probability of having a difference according to the set value, so that the transition to the advantageous section may be determined with the probability of having a difference according to the set value. Further, the probability that the AT lottery target combination will be won in the internal lottery is a uniform probability regardless of the set value set in the slot machine 1, and the AT lottery is performed when the AT lottery target combination is won. Then, the lottery may be performed with a probability of having a difference according to the set value to determine that the AT is controlled with a probability of having a difference according to the set value. Further, the probability that the AT lottery target combination will be won in the internal lottery is the probability that there is a difference depending on the set value set in the slot machine 1, and the AT lottery is performed when the AT lottery target combination is won. Then, the lottery may be performed with a probability of having a difference according to the set value to determine that the AT is controlled with a probability of having a difference according to the set value.

Further, in this embodiment, the winning combination in the internal lottery has a difference in the probability of winning in the internal lottery according to the set value set in the slot machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as a combination with a setting difference). Regardless of whether it is a winning combination (may be referred to as a winning combination with no difference in setting) or a winning combination, the advantageous section transition lottery or AT lottery is performed with the winning of the winning combination as an opportunity. However, while the winning combination in the internal lottery is a winning combination with a setting difference, the advantageous section transition lottery or AT lottery is performed, while the advantageous section transition lottery or AT lottery is triggered by the winning combination with no setting difference. It is also possible to set one of the advantageous section transition lottery and the AT lottery with the winning of the winning combination with the setting difference in the internal lottery, and set the other of the advantageous section transition lottery and the AT lottery in the internal lottery. It may be configured to be performed with the winning of a no-difference role as an opportunity.

[About the configuration of the game auxiliary display]
The configuration of the game auxiliary display 12 included in the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the game auxiliary display 12 includes two indicators 12L and 12R that can turn on / off the first to eighth segments, respectively, and can turn on each segment. It is a display. By controlling the predetermined segments of the indicators 12L and 12R to the lighting mode, predetermined numbers (“0” to “9”), symbols (for example, “-”, “.”, Etc.), and alphabetic characters (for example, “E”) are controlled. By displaying "etc." in 1 or 2 digits, the number of medals to be paid out (not shown), the fact that the medal is controlled in an advantageous section (see FIG. 6 (b)), and the type of error occurring can be displayed. It is possible to display an identifiable error code (see, for example, FIG. 10A), a navigation number (see FIG. 7) as navigation information to be notified by navigation notification, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 6B, the main control unit 41 controls the game section to an advantageous section, and when a predetermined notification start condition is satisfied (for example, after the start of the advantageous section, the navigation notification is first sent. The notification period is from the start of the game in which the payout rate (number of payouts / bets) can exceed 100%) to the time when the predetermined notification end condition is satisfied (for example, when the advantageous section ends). By controlling the eighth segment of the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 (hereinafter, may be referred to as an advantageous section notification LED 12a) to be in a lit state, it is notified that the game section is controlled to the advantageous section. It is possible to notify the advantageous section.

[Navigation notification and navigation production]
The navigation notification performed by the main control unit 41 using the game auxiliary display 12 and the navigation effect performed by the sub control unit 91 using the liquid crystal display 51 will be described with reference to FIG. 7.

The main control unit 41 controls the AT, and when the navigation target combination (in this embodiment, the push order small combination 1 to 6) is won in the internal lottery, the navigation notification is executed for the player. A navigation number capable of specifying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R (in this embodiment, the operation order, hereinafter may be referred to as a correct answer pressing order) is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. , It is possible to notify the operation mode that is advantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 7, the navigation notification includes left middle right navigation, left and right middle navigation, middle left and right navigation, middle right left navigation, right left middle navigation, and right middle left navigation. In the left middle right navigation, by displaying the navigation number "1-" on the game auxiliary display 12, it is notified that the operation mode advantageous to the player is the left middle right stop operation. In the left-right middle navigation, the navigation number "2-" is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to notify that the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is the left-right middle stop operation. In the middle / left / right navigation, the navigation number “3-” is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to notify that the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is the middle / left / right stop operation. In the middle right / left navigation, the navigation number “4-” is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to notify that the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is the middle right / left stop operation. In the right-left middle navigation, the navigation number "5-" is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to notify that the operation mode advantageous to the player is the right-left middle stop operation. In the right-middle-left navigation, the navigation number "6-" is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to notify that the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is the right-middle-left stop operation.

Further, after the main control unit 41 starts the advantageous section notification to notify that the advantageous section is controlled by the advantageous section notification LED 12a as described above, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is continuously turned on. It is designed to be controlled, and when the navigation notification is performed during the execution of the advantageous section notification, the navigation number notified by the navigation notification is displayed as a game assist while continuously controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a in the lit state. It is controlled so that it is displayed on the vessel 12.

In this embodiment, the navigation notification is configured to notify the operation order (correct answer pressing order) as an operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R which is advantageous for the player, but the player is notified by the navigation notification. The configuration may suggest the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R which is advantageous for the player, or may be the configuration which suggests the combination of the operation order and the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R which are advantageous for the player. For example, when the operation mode of the stop switch that is advantageous for the player is a predetermined operation timing for a predetermined reel, the liquid crystal display 51 corresponds to an image or the like of a symbol corresponding to the predetermined operation timing to the predetermined reel. It is possible to suggest the operation mode by displaying it at the position where the reel is used.

When performing navigation notification, the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub control unit 91 a command capable of specifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R notified by the navigation notification. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 can perform a navigation effect of displaying a navigation image suggesting an operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R specified based on a command on the liquid crystal display 51. .. In the navigation image, numerical images "1" to "3" suggesting the operation order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and a symbol image suggesting that the stop operation is performed at the timing when the predetermined symbol is displayed on the reel are displayed. , Reels 2L, 2C, 2R are displayed corresponding to.

As shown in FIG. 7, in the navigation effect, for example, when the left middle right stop operation is notified by the navigation notification, the navigation image suggesting the left middle right stop operation (in this embodiment, it corresponds to the left reel 2L). The number image of "1" is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, "2" is displayed at the position corresponding to the middle reel 2C, and "3" is displayed at the position corresponding to the right reel 2R). Display. In addition, when the left / right / middle stop operation is notified by the navigation notification, the middle / left / right stop operation is notified, the middle / right / left stop operation is notified, the right / left middle stop operation is notified, and the right / middle / left stop operation is notified. Is notified, a navigation image corresponding to the operation mode notified by the navigation notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the control is performed so as to suggest the corresponding operation mode.

[About the game section]
As shown in FIG. 8, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment can control the game section to either a normal section or an advantageous section.

The normal section is a game section in which navigation notification is not performed, and it is started when the next game is started after the advantageous section is finished, and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section by the advantageous section transition lottery. It ends by being done. In the normal section, the above-mentioned advantageous section notification is not performed, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be turned off.

Further, in the normal section, when the above-mentioned gaming state is controlled to either non-internal or internal, the above-mentioned advantageous section transition lottery target combination (pushing order small combination 1 to 6, push order small combination 1 to 6) in the internal lottery. By winning the specific small winning combination 1, the specific small winning combination 2, and the replaying combination), a lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section.

The probability that the advantageous section transition lottery target combination will be won in the internal lottery is a uniform probability regardless of the set value set in the slot machine 1, and is performed based on the winning of the advantageous section transition lottery target combination. In the advantageous section transition lottery, a lottery is performed based on a predetermined advantageous section transition lottery table to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section with a probability of being different depending on the set value set in the slot machine 1. It is possible to do. Further, in the advantageous section transition lottery, it can be determined with a uniform probability to shift to the advantageous section based on the lottery result of the internal lottery regardless of the controlled gaming state (non-internal middle, internal middle). It has become.

Further, in the advantageous section transition lottery table, the probability of determining the transition to the advantageous section when the gaming state is the general BB in the special state, that is, the probability of winning the advantageous section transition lottery is set to 0, and the BB is set. In general, even if the winning combination of the advantageous section transition lottery is won, it is not decided in the advantageous section transition lottery to shift to the advantageous section, and the transfer to the advantageous section is not performed. In addition, when the gaming state is a special state, even if the winning combination of the advantageous section transition lottery is won, the advantageous section transition lottery is not performed, so that the advantage section transition lottery may not be performed.

Further, when the gaming state is controlled by the RB in the special state, as described above, the advantageous section transition lottery target combination is not selected as the lottery target in the internal lottery and is not won, so that the advantageous section transition lottery is performed. There is no such thing, and it is not possible to shift to an advantageous section. That is, when it is controlled to a special state (BB general and RB), it is not possible to shift to an advantageous section.

Further, in the normal section, the AT lottery is not performed even if the above-mentioned AT lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery regardless of whether the above-mentioned game state is controlled in the non-internal or the internal. , It is not decided to be controlled by AT, and it is not controlled by AT. In the AT lottery during the normal section, the probability of winning the control to the AT is set to 0, so that the determination to control the AT may not be made.

The probability that the advantageous section transition lottery target combination will be won in the internal lottery is a uniform probability regardless of the set value set in the slot machine 1, and is based on the winning of the advantageous section transition lottery target combination. In the advantageous section transition lottery to be performed, a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section with a uniform probability may be performed regardless of the set value set in the slot machine 1. In addition, the probability that the advantageous section transition lottery target combination will be won in the internal lottery differs depending on the set value set in the slot machine 1, and the advantage is performed based on the winning of the advantageous section transition lottery target combination. In the section transition lottery, the lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section with a uniform probability regardless of the set value set in the slot machine 1. In addition, the probability that the advantageous section transition lottery target combination will be won in the internal lottery differs depending on the set value set in the slot machine 1, and the advantage is performed based on the winning of the advantageous section transition lottery target combination. In the section transition lottery, a lottery may be performed in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to an advantageous section with a probability of having a difference depending on the set value set in the slot machine 1.

The advantageous section is a game section in which navigation notification may be performed, and is an advantageous game section as compared with a normal section because navigation notification can be executed. The advantageous section starts when the next game is started after it is determined by the advantageous section transition lottery in the normal section that the advantageous section is transferred to the advantageous section, and ends when the predetermined advantageous section end condition is satisfied. .. In the advantageous section, the above-mentioned advantageous section notification is started at the start of the game in which the medal payout rate (number of payouts / bets) can exceed 100% by first performing the navigation notification after the start of the advantageous section. By controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to be in the lit state, it is notified that the advantageous section is controlled. Further, in the advantageous section, the navigation notification is performed when the predetermined navigation condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, the AT state is controlled to be described later and the navigation target combination is won by the internal lottery). , The operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R which is advantageous for the player is notified.

Further, in the advantageous section, when the above-mentioned gaming state is controlled inside, the AT lottery is performed by winning the AT lottery target combination in the internal lottery. By winning the AT lottery, the system shifts to the AT state in which the AT is controlled. Then, when the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, the navigation notification is performed, and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, which is advantageous for the player, is notified, and the advantageous section is , It is a game section that is more advantageous for the player than the normal section.

In the advantageous section, when the gaming state is controlled during non-internal, the AT lottery is not performed even if the AT lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery, and the AT is not controlled. It has become like. Further, in the advantageous section, even if the above-mentioned advantageous section transition lottery target combination is won by the internal lottery, the advantageous section transition lottery is not performed.

The end condition of the advantageous section is the end condition 1, which is established when the number of games in the advantageous section (the number of games in the advantageous section) reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment), and the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section. Is the specified number (in this embodiment, 2388 (the maximum number (15) of the number of payouts in the slot machine 1 is subtracted from the maximum number of 2400, and the maximum number (3) used for setting the number of bets) is added. End condition 2 that is satisfied by exceeding), an end condition that can be established without being based on the number of advantageous section games and the net increase in the number of medals, and is a predetermined arbitrary condition (in this embodiment, in the game). The end condition 3 that is satisfied when the controlled game state is non-internal) is included, and the advantageous section is terminated when at least one of the end conditions 1 to 3 is satisfied. ..

In this embodiment, when the game section is controlled to the normal section, the advantageous section transition lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery, so that the advantageous section transition lottery is performed and the advantageous section transition lottery is performed. By winning, the game section is transferred to the advantageous section, but when the game section is controlled to the normal section, the predetermined advantageous section transition combination is won, and the game section is transferred to the advantageous section. It may be configured to shift to.

In this way, the main control unit 41 can control the advantageous section in both the non-internal where the winning of the special combination (BB) is not carried over and the inside where the winning of the special combination (BB) is carried over. Is. The end condition of the advantageous section in the internal is that at least one of the end condition 1 and the end condition 2 is satisfied, while the end condition of the advantageous section in the non-internal is that the end condition 3 is satisfied. The configuration is different between the end condition of the advantageous section in the inside and the end condition of the advantageous section in the non-inside. As a result, in a configuration in which the medal payout rate is appropriate inside the inside, while the medal payout rate is not appropriate inside the non-internal, the end condition of the advantageous section inside the inside and the advantageous section inside the non-internal Since the termination condition is different, suitable control can be performed depending on whether the control is internal or non-internal.

Further, the main control unit 41 is configured not to be controlled in an advantageous section in BB in general. As a result, in the general BB where the payout rate of medals is not appropriate, the advantageous section is not controlled, so that unnecessary control regarding the advantageous section in the general BB can be avoided.

Further, the main control unit 41 is configured not to be controlled in an advantageous section in the RB. As a result, in the RB where the payout rate of medals is not appropriate, the advantageous section is not controlled, so that unnecessary control regarding the advantageous section in the RB is not necessary.

[Advantageous section notification and internal suggestions]
The preparation-preparing effect performed by the sub-control unit 91 using the liquid crystal display 51 will be described with reference to FIG. 9A.

As described above, the main control unit 41 has won the special combination (BB) in the internal lottery, but the pressing operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation in the game is completed (the stop switch is released). And when the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, the symbol combination of the special combination (BB) is not stopped on the reel, and the winning special combination (BB) is carried over without winning. If becomes, the game state is shifted from non-internal to internal at the end of the game, and controlled from the start of the next game to internal.

Further, the main control unit 41 can send a command capable of specifying the gaming state controlled according to the progress of the game to the sub control unit 91, and controls the command at the start of each game. A command that can specify the gaming state is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In addition, a command that can specify the game state, the game section, and the control state related to the AT that are currently controlled at a predetermined timing in each game (in this embodiment, when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game) is issued. It is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. Further, in the next game at a predetermined timing in each game (in this embodiment, when the operation of pressing the stop switch related to the third stop operation is completed and the game is terminated by stopping all reels). A command capable of specifying a controlled game state, a game section, and a control state related to AT is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Further, when the RAM clearing that initializes the storage area including the predetermined area in which the data related to the above-mentioned gaming state is stored is performed in the RAM 41c, a command that can specify that the RAM clearing is performed is issued to the sub-control unit 91. It is designed to be sent.

On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 can use the liquid crystal display 51 or the like to perform a preparatory effect suggesting that the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41 is not inside. Is.

As shown in FIG. 9A, after it is specified that the RAM clear is performed on the main control unit 41 side based on the command received from the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 is in a gaming state. When it is specified that the slot machine 1 has not been moved to the inside and is controlled inside the non-inside, or when the slot machine 1 is shipped from the factory, the storage means (for example, RAM or the like) of the sub control unit 91 is used. After being started in the initialized state, when it is specified that the game state is not yet controlled inside the main control unit 41 and is controlled inside the non-inside, the effect being prepared. Control to do.

In the preparation stage, the preparation screen (in this embodiment, the image of the character and the character image of "preparing") and the non-internal suggestion image (in this example, the image of the star mark) are displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is possible to display on the 51, and when it is specified that the game state is non-internal, the preparation screen and the non-internal suggestion image are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, so that the game is being prepared. It is a state and suggests that the gaming state is controlled in the non-internal, and when it is specified that the gaming state is not in the non-internal and is a special state, the non-internal suggestion image is not displayed. By displaying only the image being prepared, it is suggested that the game is being prepared and the game state is controlled to the special state.

When it is specified that the game state has been transferred to the inside based on the command received from the main control unit 41 while the preparation is being performed on the liquid crystal display 51, that is, a special role is performed in the internal lottery. (BB) was elected, but at the end of the game in which the prize of the special role (BB) was missed, the display of the preparation screen and the non-internal middle suggestion image on the liquid crystal display 51 is terminated, and the preparation is being directed. Is terminated, and the normal effect is started on the liquid crystal display 51. In the normal effect, the liquid crystal display 51 displays a normal effect screen (in this embodiment, an image showing a character walking in the city) to be displayed in a non-AT state in which AT control, which will be described later, is not performed. , Perform the production according to the progress of the game. By shifting from the preparatory production to the normal production, it is suggested that the game state is inside the main control unit 41, that is, the medal payout rate is shifted to the normal state as designed (hereinafter,). It is sometimes called an internal suggestion).

On the other hand, when it is specified that the game state is not inside but is shifted to the special state based on the command received from the main control unit 41 while the preparation preparation effect is being performed on the liquid crystal display 51. That is, at the end of the game in which the special role (BB) is won in the internal lottery and the special role (BB) wins, the display of the non-internal suggestion image is terminated and the display of the preparation screen is continued. Control to continue the production during preparation. Then, it is specified that the special state is terminated and the transition to the non-internal inside is performed based on the command received from the main control unit 41, so that the display of the non-internal inside suggestion image is controlled to be restarted. After that, it is controlled to continue the preparatory production until it is specified that the gaming state has been transferred to the inside.

The main control unit 41 is shifted to the advantageous section as described above, wins the AT lottery in the game in the advantageous section, is shifted to the AT state, and further, the predetermined start condition is set in the subsequent games. When it is established, the advantageous section notification is started. As described above, the advantageous section is shifted to the advantageous section in the non-internal, but since the end condition 3 is satisfied in the first game of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is ended in the advantageous section in the non-internal. The start condition of the notification is satisfied and the advantageous section notification is not performed. In addition, in order for the start condition of the advantageous section notification to be satisfied, at least two games (a game in which the AT lottery is performed and a game in which the navigation target combination is won) are required after the transition to the advantageous section. Occasionally, even if the section is shifted to the advantageous section, the start condition of the advantageous section notification is satisfied and the advantageous section notification is not performed. That is, when it is suggested that the effect mode of the liquid crystal display 51 by the sub control unit 91 is shifted from the preparatory effect to the normal effect and the game state is shifted to the inside, the advantageous section notification is performed. However, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is maintained in the extinguished state (see FIG. 9A).

In this way, the sub-control unit 91 starts the normal effect and starts the internal effect while the preparatory effect performed when the sub-control unit 91 is controlled in the non-internal area is transferred from the non-internal area to the internal area. By controlling to perform the normal effect instead of performing the preparatory effect when it is controlled inside, the preparatory effect is ended and the normal effect is started, so that from inside the non-internal It is a configuration that executes an internal suggestion that suggests that it has been migrated to the internal. As a result, when the transition from non-internal to internal is performed, the sub-control unit 91 executes the internal suggestion, so that the medal payout rate becomes appropriate in the situation where the game is played on the game store side. It is possible to identify that.

In addition, the sub-control unit 91 displays an internal suggestion suggesting that the game state has been transferred to the internal by ending the preparatory effect at the end of the game in which the game state has been transferred from the non-internal to the internal. It can be performed using the vessel 51. On the other hand, the main control unit 41 can use the advantageous section notification LED 12a to notify the advantageous section at the start of the next game of the game in which the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section. The position where the internal suggestion is executed and the position where the advantageous section notification is executed are different, and the timing at which the internal suggestion is executed and the timing at which the advantageous section notification is executed are different. As a result, it is possible to prevent the suggestion that the inside is inside and the suggestion that the inside is shifted to the advantageous section by the advantageous section notification from being misunderstood.

Further, the sub control unit 91 can display the preparation screen and the non-internal suggestion image on the liquid crystal display 51 in the preparation effect, and the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41 side can be displayed. When it is in the non-internal, the preparation screen and the non-internal suggestion image are displayed to suggest that the game is being prepared and the game state is controlled in the non-internal, and the main control unit. When the game state controlled on the 41 side is a special state rather than a non-internal state, the non-internal middle suggestion image is not displayed and only the preparing image is displayed, so that the game is being prepared. Moreover, it is suggested that the gaming state is controlled to a special state. As a result, after it is specified that the RAM is cleared on the main control unit 41 side, it may be specified that the gaming state has not yet been transferred to the inside and is controlled inside the non-inside. , At the time of shipment from the factory of the slot machine 1, in a situation where the game is played on the game store side until the medal payout rate becomes appropriate, it is either non-internal or internal before it becomes internal. It is possible to recognize whether it is a special state before it becomes. Further, in such a situation, by displaying the preparation screen and the non-internal suggestion image by the preparation production, the special operation mode (even if the special combination (BB) is won in the internal lottery), the special combination is displayed. (BB) is an operation mode in which it is difficult to win a prize), and it can be suggested that the medal payout rate can be set in the inside where the payout rate is appropriate. Further, in such a situation, by not displaying the non-internal suggestion image by the preparatory staging, it can be suggested that the game does not need to be played in the special operation mode until the special state is completed.

Further, the main control unit 41 can shift to the AT state for performing navigation notification while controlling internally and in an advantageous section, and after shifting to the advantageous section, first performs navigation notification. By controlling so as to perform advantageous section notification in the game, it is possible to execute advantageous section notification when controlled to the advantageous section in the inside, but it is advantageous when controlled to the advantageous section in the non-internal. It is a configuration that does not execute section notification. As a result, in a configuration in which the medal payout rate is appropriate inside, while the medal payout rate is not appropriate inside the non-internal, the medal payout rate is controlled to an advantageous section inside the inside. In some cases, the advantageous section notification can be executed, but if the medal payout rate is controlled to the advantageous section in the non-internal, the advantageous section notification is not executed, so that the medal payout rate is appropriate. In the situation where the game is played on the game store side until the inside of the inside, unnecessary advantageous section notification is not executed.

It should be noted that the preparation-preparing effect may be at least suggesting that the medal payout rate has not been transferred to the inside where the medal payout rate is appropriate on the main control unit 41 side, and only the preparation screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. It may be configured to be displayed.

In addition, the internal suggestion can suggest that the gaming state has shifted from non-internal to internal, at least in a situation where the game is played on the game store side until the medal payout rate is appropriate. As long as it is sufficient, a specific effect (for example, an effect of displaying a specific image on the liquid crystal display 51 or an effect of controlling a specific LED to a lighting state) during a period controlled internally by the main control unit 41 side. , The effect of outputting a specific sound from the speakers 53, 54, etc.) may be performed, but the specific effect may not be performed during the period controlled in the non-internal environment, or the specific effect may not be performed during the period controlled in the non-internal environment. While the specific effect is performed, the specific effect may not be performed during the period controlled inside. Further, in these configurations, the specific effect may be performed in one game or may be performed over a plurality of games. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the gaming state has shifted from non-internal to internal in a situation where the game is played on the game store side until the medal payout rate becomes appropriate. be.

In addition, the internal suggestion can suggest that the gaming state has shifted from non-internal to internal, at least in a situation where the game is played on the game store side until the medal payout rate is appropriate. If the sub-control unit 91 is controlled inside the main control unit 41 at the time of activation, the sub-control unit 91 performs a non-internal inside display effect in the non-inside, and from the non-inside. After being moved to the inside, it may be moved to the non-inside again, or the non-inside display effect may not be performed. In such a configuration, it is not necessary to execute unnecessary internal suggestions after the situation where the game is played on the game store side is completed until the medal payout rate becomes appropriate.

Further, in this embodiment, although the configuration is such that the internal internal suggestion is performed by the effect mode controlled by the sub control unit 91, the main control unit 41 may be configured to perform the internal internal suggestion. As a configuration in which the main control unit 41 makes an internal suggestion, for example, when the main control unit 41 includes an LED display suggesting that it is non-internal or internal, and the LED display is non-internal. While controlling to the lighting state, it may be configured to suggest that the LED display has moved to the inside by controlling it to the lighting state when it is inside, or it may be lighting state when the LED display is inside. On the other hand, it may be configured to suggest that it has moved to the inside by controlling it to the off state when it is not inside. Further, in a configuration in which the main control unit 41 is provided with an LED display that suggests that it is inside or outside the inside, the LED display may be a display that makes suggestions other than the suggestion inside the inside (for example, a credit display). It may be configured in common with the segment for displaying "." In the vessel 11), or it may be provided as a dedicated display for only suggesting inside.

Next, the advantageous section notification performed by the main control unit 41 using the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the navigation notification performed using the game auxiliary display 12, and the AT confirmation notification performed by the sub control unit 91 using the liquid crystal display 51, The AT effect will be described with reference to FIG. 9B.

As shown in FIG. 9B, when the game state is controlled internally and the game section is controlled to an advantageous section, the main control unit 41 performs an AT lottery and selects the AT lottery. By winning, the state shifts to the AT state in which AT control is performed thereafter. Then, after shifting to the AT state, it is the start of the game in which the navigation target role is first won in the internal lottery, and the stop switches 8L and 8C are operated after the start switch 7 for starting the game is operated. , After starting the advantageous section notification during the period before the operation of 8R is activated and starting the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the navigation notification is executed and the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Control to display.

Further, when the AT lottery is won, the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub control unit 91 a command that can specify the fact that the AT lottery has been won and the timing for shifting to the AT state. Further, at the start of each game, a command capable of specifying the result of the internal lottery is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. Further, when performing the navigation notification, a command that can specify the operation mode to be notified by the navigation notification is transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 has an AT confirmation notification that the main control unit 41 has confirmed that the AT has been controlled, and an AT effect that suggests that the AT state has been controlled. It is possible to perform a navigation effect suggesting an operation mode notified by the navigation notification using a liquid crystal display 51 or the like.

As shown in FIG. 9B, when it is specified that the AT lottery has been won based on the command received from the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 is specified to have won the AT lottery. At the predetermined timing during the period from the time when the AT state is won to the transition to the AT state (in this embodiment, at the end of the game one game before the AT state starts), the AT is confirmed. Notify. In the AT confirmation notification, the AT confirmation notification screen (in this embodiment, the character image and the character image of "AT confirmation !!") is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and is controlled by the AT on the main control unit 41 side. Notify that it has been confirmed.

Then, a predetermined timing during the period from when the AT confirmation notification is performed until the main control unit 41 shifts to the AT state (in this embodiment, at the start of the game in which the AT state is started (the game is played). When the start switch 7 for starting is operated)), the normal effect is changed to the AT effect. In the AT effect, the liquid crystal display 51 displays an AT effect screen (in this embodiment, an image showing how the character flies in outer space), which is different from the normal effect, on the main control unit 41 side. It suggests that it is controlled to the AT state.

After that, when it is specified that the navigation notification is performed based on the command received from the main control unit 41, the navigation image according to the operation mode notified by the navigation notification (for example, the navigation suggesting the middle left stop operation). By displaying an image (see FIG. 7) on the liquid crystal display 51, the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, which is advantageous for the player, is suggested.

In this way, after being controlled internally, the main control unit 41 shifts to the advantageous section, further shifts to the AT state, and starts the advantageous section notification at the start of the game in which the predetermined start condition is satisfied. By controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to be in the lit state, it is notified that the advantageous section has been shifted. On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 can perform the preparatory effect on the liquid crystal display 51 when the game state is controlled non-internally on the main control unit 41 side, and performs the preparatory effect. At the end of the game in which the game state is shifted from non-internal to internal, the game state is changed from non-internal to internal by shifting the effect mode on the liquid crystal display 51 from the preparing effect to the normal effect. It is supposed to suggest that it has been moved in.

That is, while the liquid crystal display 51 suggests that the game state has shifted to the inside, the advantageous section notification LED 12a (game auxiliary display 12) suggests that the game state has shifted to the advantageous section. The suggestion that it has been transferred to the inside and the suggestion that it has been transferred to the advantageous section are given at different places (displays). In addition, the suggestion that the game state has been transferred to the inside is given at the end of the game in which the special role (BB) is won in the internal lottery in the non-inside, whereas the indication is that the game state has been transferred to the advantageous section. The suggestion is made at the start of the game in which the start condition of the advantageous section notification is satisfied, and the suggestion that the game has been moved to the inside and the suggestion that the game has been moved to the advantageous section are given in one game. It is supposed to be done at different timings in.

[About advantageous section notification during error status and setting confirmation status]
The advantageous section notification during the error state and the setting confirmation state will be described with reference to FIG.

In the control of the advantageous section notification, the main control unit 41 does not turn off the advantageous section notification LED 12a during the notification period for controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state, and continuously controls the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state. When displaying the number of medals to be paid out, the error code, the navigation number, etc. on the game auxiliary display 12 during the notification period, the advantageous section notification LED 12a (with the corresponding segment of each display 12L, 12R for displaying these) The 8th segment of the right display 12R) is controlled to be lit together.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10A, the main control unit 41 can control an error state that makes the progress of the game impossible by detecting the occurrence of an error in the slot machine 1. When the game section is controlled to the advantageous section and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to the lighting state and the error state is controlled based on the detection of the occurrence of an error, the error state is set. Also, while continuously controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to be in the lit state, it is controlled to display an error code that can identify the type of error occurring by using the other segment of the game auxiliary display 12. Then, when the error state is canceled by a predetermined operation, the error state is terminated and the display of the error code is controlled to be terminated. Even after the error state is terminated, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is continuously controlled to the lighting state until a predetermined notification end condition is satisfied, following the control of the error state.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 41 side is in the normal state where the main control unit 41 side is not controlled by the error state or the setting confirmation state described later, the sub control unit 91 is an effect image according to the control state related to the game section and AT described later. For example, when the control state related to AT described later is a non-AT state, a normal effect screen (in this embodiment, an image showing a character walking in the city) mainly displayed in the non-AT state is displayed. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to produce an effect according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, during the period when the occurrence of an error is detected on the main control unit 41 side and the error state is controlled, the main control unit 41 does not suggest that the control is performed in an advantageous section, and the main control unit 41 does not. An error code that can identify the type of error that triggered the control to the error state on the side and an error screen that shows information about the error (for example, how to cancel) (in this embodiment, a character image and an error code). (Character image indicating) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and is controlled so as to suggest that the error state is controlled.

As described above, when the main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section to the advantageous section and controls the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state, the game is changed to an error state in which the progress of the game is disabled. Since the auxiliary display 12 is displayed with an error code that can identify the error state and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be maintained in the lit state, the error state is set based on the display content of the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to make the player recognize that the control is performed and that the control is performed in the advantageous section. In addition, the player can be made to recognize the state of the gaming machine before the transition to the error state.

Further, when the main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section and controls the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state and shifts to the error state, the error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. While controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a so as to keep it in the lit state, the sub control unit 91 does not suggest that the main control unit 41 is controlled to the advantageous section, and the error code or the error thereof. Since the information related to (for example, the release method, etc.) is controlled so as to be suggested by using the liquid crystal display 51 or the like, the liquid crystal display 51 or the like is in a state where the progress of the game is disabled on the main control unit 41 side. It is possible to prevent the user from misunderstanding that the game is controlled in an advantageous section where the game can be played, based on the content of the effect.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 10B, the main control unit 41 detects an operation of turning on the setting key switch 37 by a predetermined key operation while the game is not being played. It shifts to the setting confirmation state, disables the progress of the game, controls the setting value display 24 to display the setting value currently set in the slot machine 1, and then controls the setting key by a predetermined key operation. By detecting the operation of turning off the switch 37, the setting confirmation state can be terminated, the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to the lighting state. Occasionally, when shifting to the setting confirmation state, the setting value is displayed on the setting value display 24 (not shown) while continuously controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state even during the setting confirmation state. To control. Then, even after the setting confirmation state is terminated, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is continuously controlled to the lighting state until the predetermined notification end condition is satisfied, even before the transition to the setting confirmation state.

On the other hand, in the sub control unit 91, when the sub control unit 91 is in a normal state in which the main control unit 41 side is not controlled by the setting confirmation state or the above-mentioned error state, the normal effect screen (in this embodiment, the sub control unit 91). An image showing a character walking around the city) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and an effect is performed according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, during the period controlled by the main control unit 41 to the setting confirmation state, the main control unit 41 does not suggest that the control is performed in an advantageous section, and the main control unit 41 controls the setting confirmation state. A screen in the setting confirmation state (in this embodiment, a character image and a character image indicating that the setting is confirmed) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to indicate that the setting is confirmed, and the setting is controlled to the setting confirmation state. Control to suggest that.

As described above, when the main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section and controls the advantageous section notification LED 12a to be in the lit state, the progress of the game is disabled and the set value display 24 is currently set. When the setting confirmation state for displaying the set value is changed, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be maintained in the lit state, so that the advantageous section is controlled based on the display content of the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to make the player recognize that this is the case. In addition, the player can be made to recognize the state of the gaming machine before the transition to the setting confirmation state.

Further, when the main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section and controls the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state and shifts to the setting confirmation state, the set value display 24 (not shown). While displaying the set value on the screen and controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to be maintained in the lit state, the sub control unit 91 does not suggest that the main control unit 41 is controlled to the advantageous section. A liquid crystal display 51 or the like is used to control so as to indicate that the setting is confirmed. As a result, it is misidentified that the game is controlled to an advantageous section where the game can be played based on the content of the effect by the liquid crystal display 51 or the like in a state where the progress of the game is disabled on the main control unit 41 side. It is possible to prevent it from being caused.

[Regarding the restart order of advantageous section notification and navigation notification when the power is restored]
The resumption order of the advantageous section notification, the navigation notification, and the like when recovering from the power interruption after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped occurs will be described with reference to FIG.

When the power supply of AC100V is stopped, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment executes a power interruption process (not shown) in the timer interrupt process, and the register or RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 before the power interruption occurs. The data set in the predetermined area is saved in the storage area of the RAM 41c backed up by the backup power supply, and the data is held by supplying the backup power supply. Therefore, the slot machine 1 When the power supply to the power supply is resumed, it is possible to return to the control state before the power failure. In particular, whether or not the navigation notification was performed in the control state before the power failure, the content of the navigation notification when the navigation notification was performed, whether or not the control was performed in an advantageous section, and whether or not the stop operation was effective. It is possible to identify whether or not.

Further, when the power supply of AC100V is stopped, the sub control unit 91 executes a power cut process in the same manner as the main control unit 41, so that the control state of each staging device before the power supply is stopped. Is controlled to be held in the storage means backed up by the backup power supply, and when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, each staging device can be returned to the control state before the power failure. .. In particular, in the control state before the power supply is stopped, it is possible to specify whether or not the navigation effect is performed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the content of the navigation effect when the navigation effect is performed.

As shown in FIG. 11A, when the main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section and the AT is controlled, and the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is set. The lighting state is controlled, navigation notification is performed, and the navigation number is displayed on the game assist display 12. Further, when the rotation of at least one reel is controlled after the start of the game, the stop effective LED of the corresponding reel is controlled to be lit. At this time, the sub-control unit 91 side performs a navigation effect, and a navigation image suggesting an operation mode notified by the navigation notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

In this state, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and a power interruption occurs, as shown in FIG. 11B, the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the game auxiliary display 12, the stop effective LED 22L, 22C , 22R, the liquid crystal display 51 are all turned off, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are all stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11C, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted and restarted, the main control unit 41 first stops the power supply to the slot machine 1. By restarting the rotation control of the reel that had been controlled to rotate (not shown), returning the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 to the state before the power supply was stopped, and then performing timer interrupt processing. , The display of the operation mode of the stop switch by the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 and the lighting control of the advantageous section notification LED 12a are simultaneously restarted, and the navigation notification and the advantageous section notification are restarted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11D, the main control unit 41 is a stop switch corresponding to the reel that is performing rotation control by causing all the reels whose rotation control is restarted to rotate at a constant speed. The lighting control of the stop effective LED is restarted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11 (e), the reel rotation control, the navigation notification, the advantageous section notification, and the lighting control of the stop effective LED are restarted by the main control unit 41, and the power failure on the main control unit 41 side is resumed. When it is specified that the return processing of the above is completed, the sub control unit 91 restarts the control of the navigation effect, and the navigation image suggesting the operation mode notified by the navigation notification on the liquid crystal display 51. Resume the display.

As a result, the control state of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the game auxiliary display 12, the stop effective LED, the reel, and the liquid crystal display 51 is returned to the state before the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped. ..

In this way, when the navigation notification and the navigation effect are being performed in the advantageous section, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, and then the power supply is restarted, so that the control state of the navigation notification and the navigation effect is changed. When returning to the state before the power supply is stopped, the main control unit 41 controls to simultaneously restart the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a and the display of the navigation notification of the game auxiliary display 12. As a result, the navigation notification by the game auxiliary display 12 is restarted before the advantageous section notification by the advantageous section notification LED 12a is restarted, and the advantageous section notification does not notify that the advantageous section is used. , It is possible to prevent the navigation notification from being restarted.

In this embodiment, when the control state of the navigation notification and the navigation effect is returned to the state before the power supply is stopped in the advantageous section, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on and the navigation notification of the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed. However, it is also possible to restart the display of the navigation notification of the game auxiliary display 12 after restarting the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, and even in such a configuration, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is advantageous. It is possible to prevent the navigation notification by the game auxiliary display 12 from being restarted before the section notification is restarted.

The control contents of various processes performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19.

[About main processing]
The main control unit 41 is activated when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and executes various processes according to the program stored in the ROM 41b. After startup, first, the startup setting process is executed to initialize the internal register provided in the main control unit 41, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the predetermined output port, and the like, and then the main process is executed. The main process is a process that is repeatedly executed for each unit of the game, and one cycle of the main process corresponds to one unit of the game.

Hereinafter, the control contents of the main process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the main process, first, the game start waiting process (Sa1), which will be described later, waits until the game is started is executed. After that, an internal lottery process for performing an internal lottery is executed as the start switch 7 is operated to start the game (Sa2).

In the internal lottery process, is it allowed to win each lottery target combination that is the lottery target of the internal lottery based on the random number value for the internal lottery latched when the start switch 7 is operated in the step of Sa1? That is, a process of determining whether or not to allow the derivation of a predetermined display result is performed. Then, a winning number that can identify which lottery target combination (including loss) has been won is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. A winning combination number is assigned to each lottery target combination in advance, and if any of the lottery target combinations is won in the internal lottery, the winning combination number is set as the winning number. If you want to win the lottery target combination, that is, if you lose, 0 is set as the winning number.

Then, after the internal lottery process is executed in the step of Sa2, the ball ejection control process described later, which performs the process related to the game section, is executed (Sa3). After that, a reel control process for controlling the rotation and stop of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is executed (Sa4).

In the reel control process, when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game, all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are controlled to rotate at a predetermined rotation speed, and then the stop switches 8L, 8C, Control is performed to stop the corresponding reel according to the operation of 8R. Further, the reel control process ends when the stop control for all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is completed and the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released (the pressing operation of the stop switch is completed). Will be done.

Further, in the reel control process, after starting the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, all the reels rotate at a constant speed, so that the left, middle right, and stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R are controlled to be lit. do. After that, the stop switch is operated for the rotating reel to control the stop effective LED of the corresponding stop switch to the off state.

Further, in the reel control process, after stopping the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination on the winning line LN is stopped as the display result of each reel 2L, 2C and 2R. To determine whether or not a prize has occurred. Then, when a prize has been generated, a prize flag capable of identifying the winning combination in which the prize has occurred is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

Then, after the reel control process is executed in the step of Sa4, the AT state management process described later, which performs the process related to the end of the advantageous section, is executed (Sa5). After that, a medal payout process, which will be described later, is executed, which processes the medal payout according to the symbol combination stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as a result of the game (Sa6). After that, when the re-game combination wins a prize, the re-game operation process, which will be described later, is executed (Sa7).

After executing the re-game operation time process in the step of Sa7, the advantageous section notification flag is set with reference to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the advantageous section notification flag can be set by the ball ejection control process in the step of Sa3 (Sa8). It is determined whether or not it has been done (Sa9).

When it is determined that the advantageous section notification flag is not set in the step of Sa9, the state control data (off) for controlling the lighting mode of the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the off state is stored in a predetermined register (for example, the main CPU 41a). (Sa10), the status control data (off) of the predetermined register is read into the accumulator register, etc. of the It is set to the output buffer corresponding to the output port that outputs the control signal to the 8th segment in 12R (hereinafter, may be referred to as an output buffer for the advantageous section notification LED) (Sa11). Then, the interrupt one-time wait process that waits until the timer interrupt process is performed once is performed (Sa12), and the LED dynamic display process described later executed in the timer interrupt process is performed to display the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12. After controlling the eighth segment, that is, the advantageous section notification LED 12a in the light-off state, the process proceeds to the step of Sa13. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section notification flag is set in the step of Sa9, the process proceeds to the step of Sa13 without performing each process of the steps of Sa10 to Sa12.

When the process of waiting for one interrupt is performed in the step of Sa12, or when it is determined that the advantageous section notification flag is set in the step of Sa9, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is initialized at the end of the game. Execution of the setting process at the end of the game to be set (Sa13). In the game end-time setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which data used only for the game (for example, data indicating a winning result of a general winning combination in an internal lottery) is stored is set as an initialization target. In addition, when a special combination wins a prize in the game and control of the special state is started, or when control of the special state is terminated, data related to the special state (for example, data indicating the type of the special state) or A predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which data for counting the number of medals to be paid out in the special state) is stored is set as the initialization target. The predetermined area of the RAM 41c set as the initialization target will be initialized at the start of the next game by the above-mentioned game start waiting process.

After executing the game end setting process in the step of Sa13, the process returns to the step of Sa1 and the steps of Sa1 to Sa13 are repeated. When the main process goes through, the process related to the control of one unit of game is completed, and the main process is repeatedly executed for each unit of game.

In the main process, a predetermined command is generated according to the progress of the game, set in the command queue, and a process of transmitting the command to the sub control unit 91 is appropriately executed.

Further, in the main process of the present embodiment, when the advantageous section notification flag is not set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the output buffer for the advantageous section notification LED is used every time the game in which the advantageous section notification flag is not set ends. The output for the advantageous section notification LED is when the advantageous section notification flag is not set and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is in the lit state. The configuration may be such that state control data (off) is set in the buffer. In such a configuration, the state control data (off) is set in the output buffer for the advantageous section notification LED only when the advantageous section notification flag is not set and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is in the lit state. Therefore, the processing for turning off the advantageous section notification LED 12a can be performed, and the processing load can be reduced.

As described above, in the main process, when the advantageous section notification flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a (the eighth segment of the right display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) is used. While the state control data (lighting) is set and the lighting mode of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to the lighting state, when the advantageous section notification flag is not set, the state is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. By setting the control data (turning off) and controlling the lighting mode of the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the off state, the navigation notification is first performed after the start of the advantageous section, and the payout rate (number of payouts / bet number). The advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be lit for a period from the start of the game in which the data can exceed 100% to the end of the game in which the advantageous section ends, so as to notify that the advantageous section is controlled. It has become.

Further, in the main process, if the advantageous section notification flag is not set after executing the predetermined process including the game start waiting process and the reel control process, the state control data (turns off) is stored in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. ) Is set to control the lighting mode of the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the extinguished state. The reel control process is terminated when the third stop operation is terminated (the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released), which is advantageous after the third stop operation is terminated. The section notification LED 12a is controlled to be turned off. Then, after the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be turned off, the game end time setting process is executed and the process returns to the game start waiting process of the first step, so that the main process completes. That is, in the main process, the control for switching the lighting mode of the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the extinguished state within the period from the end of the third stop operation in the game to the start of the game start waiting process of the next game. Can be done.

Further, in the main process, after the internal lottery process is performed, the ball ejection control process is performed while the reel control process is performed, and the control is performed in an advantageous section, which is advantageous because a predetermined notification start condition is satisfied. Since the state control data (lighting) is set in the output buffer for the section notification LED and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to the lighting state, the game is started at the start of the game in which the predetermined notification start condition is satisfied. After the start switch 7 for starting is operated and before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for stopping the reel becomes effective, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started to light, which is advantageous. The section notification LED 12a notifies that the section is controlled to an advantageous section.

Further, in the main process, after performing the reel control process and the process at the time of replay operation, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section notification flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the advantageous section notification flag is not set. In this case, the state control data (off) is set in the output buffer for the advantageous section notification LED to turn off the advantageous section notification LED 12a. Therefore, when the advantageous section is ended, the end condition (end condition 1) of the advantageous section is set. At the end of the game in which at least one of the ending conditions of 3) is satisfied, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off to notify that the advantageous section has ended.

[About the game start waiting process]
The control content of the game start waiting process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the game start waiting process, first, the value of the replay medal counter set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is read into the predetermined register, the replay medal counter is initialized, and the value is set to 0. (Sb1). In addition, when the re-game combination is won and the re-game is given to the re-game medal counter in the previous game by the re-game operation time processing in the main process related to the previous game, a new game is played. A numerical value (3 in this embodiment) corresponding to the specified number of bets required for this is set. On the other hand, when the replay is not given in the previous game, the value (0) at the time of initialization in the step of the Sb1 is maintained.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the replay medal counter is larger than 0 based on the value read into the predetermined register in the step of Sb1 (Sb2). Then, when it is determined in the step of Sb2 that the value of the medal counter for replay is larger than 0, that is, when the replay is given in the previous game, the medal insertion execution process is performed (Sb3).

In the medal insertion execution process, the value of the replay medal counter read into the predetermined register in the step of Sb1 is set as the bet number, and 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are set to the lit state, and the specified number (this embodiment). Then, control is performed so as to notify that the bet number of 3) is set. When setting the bet number, the value of the predetermined register in which the value of the replay medal counter is read in the step of Sb1 is subtracted by 1, the bet number is added by 1, and the bet number after the addition is 1 After setting ~ 3BETLEDs 14 ~ 16 to the lighting state, the process of controlling the corresponding 1 ~ 3BETLEDs 14 ~ 16 to the lighting state by the LED dynamic display processing of the timer interrupt process is repeated until the value of the replay medal counter becomes 0. When the value of the re-game medal counter becomes 0, the process of setting the bet number is completed, and each time the bet number is added by 1, 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are turned on. It is designed to be controlled sequentially. In addition, the value of the re-game medal counter is added to the number of bets at a time, all 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are set to the lit state, and 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are controlled to be lit by the LED dynamic display process. Therefore, it is also possible to control all of the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 to be lit at the same time by one timer interrupt process.

After performing the medal insertion execution process in the step of Sb3, the medal care permission setting process is performed (Sb4). Further, when it is determined in the step of Sb2 that the value of the medal counter for replay is not larger than 0, that is, when the replay is not given in the previous game, the process of the step of Sb3 is not executed. Proceed to the step of Sb4 and perform the medal care permission setting process.

In the medal care permission setting process, the value of the credit set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and when the value of the credit does not reach the maximum value (50 in this embodiment) and there is a vacancy in the credit. And, referring to the set value of the bet number, when the value of the bet number does not reach the specified number (3 in this embodiment) and the bet number is vacant, the medal insertion unit 4 A medal care permission flag indicating that the medal is allowed to be inserted is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In this embodiment, in the medal care permission setting process, the medal care permission flag is set when there is a vacancy in the credit regardless of whether or not the replay is granted. If is granted, even if there is a vacancy in the credit, the medal care permission flag is not set, and if there is a vacancy in the number of bets, or if there is a vacancy in the credit and no replay is granted. , The medal care permission flag may be set.

After performing the medal care permission setting process in the step of Sb4, the interrupt wait process is performed once (Sb5). By performing the interrupt wait processing once, the timer interrupt processing is performed and the detection status of various switches, the lighting status of the LED, the various timers, etc. are updated, and the detection status of these various switches is updated. In this state, subsequent processing (for example, medal detection processing and operation input reception processing described later) can be performed.

After the interrupt wait process is performed once in the step of Sb5 and the timer interrupt is performed once, the medal is referred to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c where the medal care permission flag can be set by the above-mentioned medal care permission setting process. It is determined whether or not the maintenance permission flag is set (Sb6).

When it is determined that the medal care permission flag is set in the step of Sb6, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to the ON state (energized state) (Sb7). By setting the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the ON state, the flow path of the medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 is switched to the hopper tank side, and the medal is controlled to be taken into the slot machine 1. Further, the lighting mode of the insertion request LED 17 is set to the lighting state (Sb8), and control is performed so as to notify that the medal can be inserted. After setting the lighting mode of the ON request LED 17 to the lighting state, the timer interrupt processing is executed and the LED dynamic display processing is performed, so that the ON request LED 17 is controlled to the lighting state.

Then, after the insertion request LED 17 is set to the lighting state in the step of Sb8, the medal detection process is performed (Sb9). If it is determined that the medal care permission flag is not set in the step of Sb6, the process proceeds to the step of Sb9 and the medal detection process is performed without executing each process of the step of Sb7 and the step of Sb8.

In the medal detection process, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the output signal of the insertion medal sensor 31 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a medal insertion signal) or the transition of the medal insertion signal, and when it is determined that there is no abnormality, the medal is awarded. The medal insertion status is determined based on the transition of the insertion signal. Then, when a normal medal insertion is detected, a process of setting the number of bets and accepting medals for credits is performed. On the other hand, when an abnormal medal insertion is detected, error processing is performed to control the error state that makes the progress of the game impossible. The error state is cleared by operating the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38. When the error state is cleared, if the abnormality that caused the control of the error state (for example, medal jam within the detection range of the inserted medal sensor 31) is not resolved, the error state is canceled again. It will be controlled by the error state.

After performing the medal detection process in the step of Sb9, the operation input acceptance process for accepting the operation by the switch is performed by enabling the switch to accept the operation of various switches and operating the switch for which the operation is enabled. Do (Sb10).

In the operation input acceptance process, when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal and the credit set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is 1 or more, the operation is accepted by the MAXBET switch 6. Activate. Further, when the number of bets set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is a specified number when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the acceptance of the operation by the start switch 7 is enabled. Further, when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the acceptance of the operation by the settlement switch 10 and the setting key switch 37 is enabled.

Further, in the operation input acceptance process, when the operation by the start switch 7 is valid and the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, a start flag indicating that the start switch 7 has been operated is set in the predetermined register. After that, by setting the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state (non-energized state), the flow path of the medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 is switched to the medal payout outlet 9 side, and the inserted medal is used by the player. Control to return to. Further, when the operation by the setting key switch 37 is detected while the operation by the setting key switch 37 is enabled, the setting value display process for displaying the set value on the setting value display 24 is performed. Further, when the operation by the settlement switch 10 is detected while the operation by the settlement switch 10 is valid, the settlement process of returning the medals stored in the credit to the player is performed. Further, when the operation by the MAXBET switch 6 is enabled and the operation by the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, the number of medals up to the specified number is set as the bet number within the possible range based on the credit, and the bet number is set. Performs the process of subtracting the set number of medals from the credit. After performing the processing according to the switches for which the operation is detected, the operation input acceptance processing is terminated.

After performing the operation input acceptance process in the step of Sb10, it is determined whether or not a valid operation by the start switch 7 is detected based on the start flag (Sb11). If it is determined that the start flag is not set in the predetermined register and the effective operation by the start switch 7 is not detected, the process proceeds to the step of Sb12, and the start effective LED display process for controlling the lighting mode of the start effective LED 18 is performed. Do (Sb12).

In the start valid LED display process, when the operation by the start switch 7 is effectively set by the operation input reception process of the step of Sb10 and the operation of the switches other than the reset switch 23 is not detected, the start valid LED 18 is set. When the operation of switches other than the reset switch 23 is detected while the operation by the start switch 7 is enabled while the lighting state is set, and the operation by the start switch 7 is enabled. If not, the start valid LED 18 is set to the off state. As a result, when the operation by the start switch 7 is valid and the switches other than the reset switch 23 are not operated, the start valid LED 18 is controlled to be in the lit state, so that the start switch 7 can be turned on. Notifies that the operation by is effective. Further, when the operation by the start switch 7 is valid, but the switches other than the reset switch 23 are being operated, or when the operation by the start switch 7 is not effectively set, the start is valid. By controlling the LED 18 to the off state, it is notified that the operation by the start switch 7 is invalid.

After performing the start valid LED display process in the step of Sb12, the process returns to the step of Sb5, and each process of the steps of Sb5 to Sb12 is repeated until it is determined that an effective operation by the start switch 7 is detected in the step of Sb11. conduct. The start-enabled LED 18 is controlled to the lighting mode set by the start-enabled LED display process by performing one interrupt wait process in the step of Sb5 after performing the start-enabled LED display process in the step of Sb12. It becomes.

In the step of Sb11, when the start flag is set in the predetermined register and it is determined that the effective operation by the start switch 7 is detected, the random number value for the internal lottery is acquired from the random number circuit 42 and the predetermined value of the RAM 41c is determined. Set in the area (Sb13). After that, the start valid LED 18 and the insertion request LED 17 are set to the off state (Sb14, Sb15), the medal care permission flag is cleared from the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb16), and the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 is cleared. (Sb17), the game start waiting process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

After that, in the main process, the internal lottery process in which the internal lottery is performed using the random number value for the internal lottery acquired in the step of Sb13, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R depending on the detection of the operation of the start switch 7. One game is started by performing a reel control process or the like of starting rotation and stopping the corresponding reel in response to the detection of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

In this way, in the game start waiting process, when the re-game is granted, the medal insertion execution process is executed, the number of bets for performing the re-game is set, and the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are lit. Sequentially control.

Further, in the game start waiting process, a medal care permission flag is set, and when there is a vacancy in at least one of the credits or the number of bets and medals can be inserted, the flow of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 The flow path switching solenoid 30 is controlled to be in the ON state so as to switch the path to the hopper tank side, and the lighting mode of the closing request LED 17 is controlled to be in the lighting state.

Further, in the game start waiting process, when the operation by the start switch 7 is valid and the switches other than the reset switch 23 are not operated by performing the start valid LED display process, While controlling the start effective LED 18 to the lit state, the operation by the start switch 7 is effective, but when the switches other than the reset switch 23 are being operated, or the operation by the start switch 7 is effective. When it is not set to, the start valid LED 18 is controlled to be turned off.

Further, in the game start waiting process, when the valid operation of the start switch 7 is detected by the operation input reception process, the input request LED 17 and the start valid LED 18 are set to the off state, and the number of payouts of the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed. By setting to clear, then the timer interrupt process is performed, so that the input request LED 17 and the start valid LED 18 are controlled to be turned off, and the payout number display on the game auxiliary display 12 is erased. Become.

Further, in the game start waiting process, it is possible to perform a process (Sb8) for setting the lighting state of the insertion request LED 17 after performing the medal insertion execution process (Sb3). The bet number is set according to the granting of the re-game, and after the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are sequentially controlled to the lighting state, the input request LED 17 is controlled to the lighting state.

Further, in the game start waiting process, in a series of processes (Sb6 to Sb12) after the interrupt one-time wait process (Sb5) is performed, a process (Sb8) for setting the lighting state of the input request LED 17 is performed, and further start is valid. Since it is possible to perform LED display processing (Sb12), it is turned on by timer interrupt processing after the process of setting the lighting state of these ON request LEDs 17 (Sb8) and the start valid LED display process (Sb12). The request LED 17 and the start effective LED 18 can be controlled to be lit at the same time.

[About ball ejection control processing]
The control content of the ball ejection control process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 14, in the ball ejection control process, first, the section information that can specify the currently controlled game section is acquired by referring to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sc1). By default, the section information is a value indicating that the currently controlled game section is a normal section, and an advantageous section can be obtained by the corresponding processing of the ball ejection control processing or the AT state management processing described later. It can be updated to the value shown.

Then, it is determined whether or not the currently controlled gaming section is an advantageous section based on the section information acquired in the step of Sc1 (Sc2). When it is determined in the step of Sc2 that the currently controlled gaming section is not an advantageous section, which internal lottery target combination (including loss) is won in the internal lottery with reference to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The winning number that can be specified is acquired (Sc3), and it is determined whether or not the winning combination for the advantageous section transition lottery for which the advantageous section transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is won (Sc4). A combination number is assigned in advance to each internal lottery target combination that is subject to the internal lottery, and a combination number within a predetermined range is assigned in advance to the advantageous section transition lottery target combination among the internal lottery target combinations. Has been done. It is possible to determine whether or not the advantageous section transition lottery target combination has been won based on whether or not the combination number of the internal lottery target combination specified based on the winning number is within a predetermined range. ing.

Then, when it is determined in the step of Sc4 that the winning combination for the advantageous section transition lottery has been won, the advantageous section transition lottery process for performing the advantageous section transition lottery is executed (Sc5). After that, it is determined whether or not it is decided to win the advantageous section transition lottery and shift to the advantageous section (Sc6). When it is determined in the step of Sc6 that the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section has been won, the update data (advantageous section) of the section information is acquired in the predetermined register (Sc7), and the update data acquired in the predetermined register (Sc7). (Advantageous section) is used to update the section information to a value indicating the advantageous section (Sc8). As a result, the advantageous section is started from the next game of the game based on the updated section information (value indicating the advantageous section) in the game, and the advantageous section game described later with the next game as the first game of the advantageous section. The number counter counts the number of games in the advantageous section.

Then, the advantageous section start setting process for setting the advantageous section to be started as a result of winning the advantageous section transition lottery is performed (Sc9). In the advantageous section start time setting process, the process of initializing the end condition (arbitrary end condition, etc.) of the advantageous section to be started according to the type of the winning advantageous section transition lottery target combination, and the process of initializing the advantageous section are performed during the advantageous section. The process of setting the lottery table used for the AT lottery, the process of setting various counters used in the advantageous section, and the like are performed.

Then, after performing the advantageous section start setting process in the Sc9 step, the ball ejection control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. Further, in the Sc4 step, if it is determined that the advantageous section transition lottery target combination has not been won based on the winning number, or if it is determined in the Sc6 step that the advantageous section transition lottery has not been won, Sc5 to The ball ejection control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process without performing each process of the Sc9 step.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game section currently controlled in the Sc2 step is an advantageous section, the number of games continuously controlled in the advantageous section (hereinafter, may be referred to as the number of advantageous section games) is determined. After adding 1 to the advantageous section game number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c for counting (Sc10), the payout state information set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (control state regarding the currently controlled AT). After acquiring the currently controlled ball ejection state (control state related to AT) in a predetermined register (Sc11), the process related to the currently controlled ball ejection state is executed. Performs ball ejection state-related processing (Sc12).

In the payout state-related process, the payout state acquired in the predetermined register at the start of the process, that is, the process related to the currently controlled payout state is performed. The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can control a non-AT state and an AT state (non-hold state, first hold state, second hold state), which will be described later, as a ball ejection state (control state relating to AT). In the ball state-related processing, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the current control state is terminated and control is performed so as to shift to the control state according to the established transition condition. In addition, various processes are performed according to the currently controlled ball ejection state (see FIG. 23 and the like).

Further, in the ball ejection state-related processing, it is determined whether or not the game state is non-internal in each game, and when it is determined that the game state is non-internal, the above-mentioned arbitrary end condition (end condition) of the advantageous section is determined. An arbitrary end condition establishment flag indicating that 3) is established is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and control is performed so that the advantageous section is terminated. As a result, when the gaming section is transferred to the advantageous section when the gaming state is controlled in the non-internal, the next game of the game shifted to the advantageous section, that is, one of the advantageous sections in the non-internal In the game, control to end the advantageous section.

Further, in the ball ejection state-related processing, as will be described later, the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, and when the above-mentioned advantageous section notification start condition for starting the advantageous section notification is satisfied (in this embodiment, the advantageous section). After the transition to, the game is first controlled to the AT state, and in the AT state, the navigation target combination is first won by the internal lottery and the navigation notification is performed by the control of the AT, that is, after the start of the advantageous section. The advantageous section notification flag indicating that the advantageous section notification is started is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the start of the game in which the navigation notification is first performed and the payout rate (number of payouts / bets) can exceed 100%). Then, the control of the advantageous section notification by the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to set the arbitrary end condition establishment flag when the end condition 3 is satisfied without being based on the value of the navigation game number counter in the ball ejection state related processing. If the end conditions 1 to 3 are not satisfied, the advantageous section is not terminated even if the AT state is terminated, but even if the end conditions 1 to 3 are not satisfied in the ball ejection state related processing. , The advantageous section may be terminated when the AT state is terminated. For example, in the ball ejection state-related processing, it is determined whether or not the value of the navigation game number counter described later becomes 0 in each game in the AT state. Then, when it is determined that the value of the navigation game number counter becomes 0, the arbitrary end condition establishment flag may be set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c so that the advantageous section is also terminated at the end of the AT state.

After performing the ball ejection state-related processing in the step of Sc12, is the arbitrary end condition establishment flag set by referring to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the arbitrary end condition establishment flag can be set by the ball ejection state-related processing? It is determined whether or not the arbitrary termination condition is satisfied based on whether or not (Sc13). If the arbitrary end condition establishment flag is set and it is determined that the arbitrary end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section end flag setting process is performed (Sc14), and the advantageous section end flag indicating that the advantageous section is terminated is set. It is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

Then, after the advantageous section end flag setting process is performed in the step of Sc14, is the advantageous section notification flag set with reference to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the advantageous section notification flag can be set by the ball ejection state related process? It is determined whether or not (Sc15). Further, in the step of Sc13, when it is determined that the arbitrary end condition establishment flag is not set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the process of the step of Sc14 is not performed, the process proceeds to the process of the step of Sc15, and the advantageous section notification flag is displayed. Is determined (Sc15).

Then, when it is determined in the step of Sc15 that the advantageous section notification flag is set, the state control data (lighting) for controlling the display mode of the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state is read into the predetermined register. (Sc16), after setting the state control data (lighting) of the predetermined register in the output buffer for the advantageous section notification LED (Sc17), one interrupt wait process is performed (Sc18), and the timer interrupt process is executed. By the LED dynamic display process described later, the display mode of the eighth segment, that is, the advantageous section notification LED 12a in the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to the lighting state. After that, an instruction setting process for executing the navigation notification setting is performed (Sc19). On the other hand, when it is determined in the step of Sc15 that the advantageous section notification flag is not set, each process in the steps Sc16 to Sc18 is not performed, and the process proceeds to the step Sc19 and the instruction setting process is performed (Sc19).

In the instruction setting process, when the control state (ball ejection state) related to AT is controlled to the AT state and it is specified by the internal lottery that the navigation target combination has been won, the navigation according to the navigation target combination is specified. The notification is executed, and the operation mode (for example, push order, operation timing, etc.) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, which is advantageous for the player according to the navigation target combination, is notified by using the game auxiliary display 12. At the same time, a command that can specify the operation mode is controlled to be transmitted to the sub control unit 91. On the other hand, when the control state related to AT is not controlled to the AT state, the navigation notification is not executed even if the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, which are advantageous for the player, It is controlled so that a command that can specify the operation mode of 8R is not transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

Then, after performing the instruction setting process in the step of Sc19, the ball ejection control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

In this way, in the ball ejection control process, the control is performed in the advantageous section, and when the predetermined advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied, the state control data (lighting) is set in the output buffer for the advantageous section notification LED. Since the display mode of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to the lighting state, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started to light at the start of the game in which the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a controls the advantageous section. It is possible to notify that it has been done.

Further, in the ball ejection control process, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, 1 is always added to the advantageous section game number counter for each game, and the number of games played during the advantageous section is counted. As a result, in the AT state management process described later, it is determined that the number of games played during the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment) based on the advantageous section game number counter. In this case, since it is controlled so as to end the advantageous section, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from exceeding the upper limit number of games and prevent the long-term medal payout rate from becoming excessive.

In the ball payout control process of this embodiment, when the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied, that is, the navigation notification is performed first after the start of the advantageous section, the payout rate (number of payouts / bet number) is 100%. It is configured to control the advantageous section notification by the advantageous section notification LED 12a at the start of the game that can be exceeded, but the advantageous section notification is first navigated after the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section. It may be configured to start at a predetermined timing in the period until the game in which the notification is given and the payout rate (number of payouts / bets) can exceed 100%. For example, after the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section. A configuration in which the advantageous section notification is started at the start of the game, or a configuration in which the advantageous section notification is started by playing a predetermined number of games after the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section. After the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section notification may be started by stopping the predetermined symbol combination on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

Further, in the payout control process of the present embodiment, the advantageous section notification is first performed as a navigation notification after the start of the advantageous section, and at the start of the game in which the payout rate (payout number / bet number) can exceed 100%. Although it is configured to start and end at the end of the advantageous section, the advantageous section notification satisfies a predetermined end condition in the period from the start of the advantageous section to the end of the advantageous section (for example,). It may be configured so that it can be terminated once (such as when the AT state is terminated).

In the ball ejection control process, it is determined whether or not the game state is non-internal in each game in the advantageous section, and if it is determined that the game state is non-internal, the end condition 3 of the advantageous section is satisfied. By determining and controlling so as to end the advantageous section at the end of the game, when the advantageous section is controlled in the non-internal, the advantageous section is terminated in the game in which the advantageous section is started. As a result, in a configuration in which the medal payout rate is appropriate inside the inside, while the medal payout rate is not appropriate inside the non-internal, the advantageous section is controlled to be an advantageous section in the non-internal. Since the advantageous section is terminated in the started game, even if the game is controlled to the advantageous section in the situation where the game store plays the game until the medal payout rate becomes appropriate, before the player plays the game. Since the advantageous section ends and the player does not play the game while the game store has shifted to the advantageous section, that is, the advantageous state, the fairness is impaired when the player plays the game. It can be prevented from being lost.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to end the advantageous section by establishing that the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit as a condition for ending the advantageous section. In such a configuration, if the advantageous section is controlled in the non-internal, and the advantageous section is not terminated in the game in which the advantageous section is started, the advantageous section transferred in the non-internal is moved into the internal. Will continue after the transition. Then, in the advantageous section transferred to the non-internal, the number of games that can be played in the internal before the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied is not as compared with the advantageous section transferred in the internal. It will be reduced by the number of games played inside, and if the player plays a game in the advantageous section shifted to the non-inside, fairness will be impaired. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the advantageous section is controlled in the non-internal, the advantageous section is terminated in the game in which the advantageous section is started, so that the medal payout rate is appropriate. Even if it is controlled to an advantageous section in the situation where the game is played on the side of the game store until it becomes inside, the advantageous section ends before the player plays the game, and the fairness is impaired when the player plays the game. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game state is non-internal in each game in the advantageous section, and if it is determined that the game state is non-internal, the advantageous section ends at the end of the game. By controlling so as to make the advantageous section end in the game in which the advantageous section starts when the advantageous section is controlled in the non-internal environment, the advantageous section ends in the game in which the advantageous section starts. Any configuration may be used, for example, only in the first game of the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the game state is non-internal, and if it is determined that the game state is non-internal, it is advantageous at the end of the game. It may be configured to control so as to end the section.

[About AT state management processing]
The control content of the AT state management process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the AT state management process, first, the section information set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired in the predetermined register (Sd1). Then, it is determined whether or not the currently controlled gaming section is an advantageous section based on the section information (Sd2).

Then, when it is determined that the game section currently controlled in the step of Sd2 is an advantageous section, the advantageous section is referred to with reference to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the advantageous section end flag can be set by the above-mentioned ball ejection control process. It is determined whether or not the end flag is set (Sd3). When it is determined that the advantageous section end flag is not set in the step of Sd3, it is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the advantageous section game number counter updated in the above-mentioned payout control process is referred to ( Sd4), it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment) based on the advantageous section game number counter (Sd5).

When it is determined in the step of Sd5 that the number of advantageous section games has not reached the upper limit, it is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section (payment in the advantageous section). Refer to the net increase number counter for counting the total number of medals issued by subtracting the total number of medals used for setting the bet number in the advantageous section (Sd6), and refer to the net increase number counter. The value is acquired in a predetermined register as a net increase number of sheets value. Then, the payout number value of the medal to be paid out based on the winning flag of the game is specified, and the payout number value is added to the net increase number value of the predetermined register (Sd7). After that, the bet value set in the game is specified, and the bet value is subtracted from the net increase number value of the predetermined register to calculate a new net increase number value (Sd8). Then, it is determined whether or not the new net increase number value calculated in the predetermined register is 0 or more (Sd9).

If it is determined in the step of Sd9 that the net increase in the number of sheets in the predetermined register is not 0 or more, the net increase in the number of sheets in the predetermined register is set to 0 (Sd10), and then the process proceeds to the step of Sd11. On the other hand, if it is determined in the step of Sd9 that the net increase number value of the predetermined register is 0 or more, the process of the step of Sd10 is not performed, the net increase number value of the predetermined register is maintained, and the process proceeds to the step of Sd11. ..

In the step of Sd11, the net increase number value set in the predetermined register is the specified number (in this embodiment, 2388 (the maximum number (15) of the number of payouts in the slot machine 1 is subtracted from the upper limit number of 2400 sheets). It is determined whether or not the maximum number of cards (3 cards) used for setting the number of bets (value added)) has been exceeded (Sd11). When it is determined in the step of Sd11 that the net increase number value of the predetermined register does not exceed the specified number of sheets, the net increase number counter of the predetermined register is set to the net increase number counter of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The value of is updated to a new net increase number value (Sd12).

After updating the net increase number counter to a new net increase number value in the step of Sd12, the AT state management process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. Further, even when it is determined that the game section currently controlled in the step of Sd2 is not an advantageous section, the AT state management process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section end flag is set in the step of Sd3, and when it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit in the step of Sd5, the medal in the advantageous section in the step of Sd11 is determined. If it is determined that the net increase number exceeds the specified number, the process proceeds to the step of Sd13, and the predetermined area in the storage area of the RAM 41c in which the data related to control is stored is initialized to set the advantageous section. The advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) to be terminated is performed.

In the advantageous section data initialization process, first, the number of divisions of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized in the process (2 in this embodiment) is set in the predetermined register (D) as the number of initialization area divisions (Sd13). .. Then, the RAM initialization table (the value of the start address of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized and the number of storage areas (capacity, the number of included addresses) to be initialized correspond to the values indicated by the number of divisions. The address of the storage area of the ROM 41b in which the set table) is stored is set in the predetermined register (HL) (Sd14). After that, the number of storage areas corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions of the predetermined register (D) is acquired from the storage area of the ROM 41b specified based on the address of the RAM initialization data table set in the predetermined register (HL). Then, it is set in the predetermined register (B) as the number of addresses in the initialization target area, and the value of the start address corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions in the predetermined register (D) is acquired and used as the initialization target RAM address. Set to the predetermined register (C) (Sd15).

Then, after the initialization data (for example, 0) is set in the predetermined register (A) (Sd16), the initialization data (for example, 0) is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the initialization target RAM address set in the predetermined register (C). By setting the initialization data set in the register (A), the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is initialized with the initialization data (Sd17). After that, by adding 1 to the value of the predetermined register (C), the initialization target RAM address is advanced by one (Sd18).

Then, by subtracting 1 from the value of the predetermined register (B), after subtracting 1 from the number of remaining addresses (Sd19), it is determined whether or not the number of remaining addresses is larger than 0 (Sd20). If it is determined in the step of Sd20 that the number of remaining initial addresses is larger than 0, the process returns to the step of Sd17, and each process of Sd17 to Sd20 is repeated until the number of remaining addresses becomes 0. As a result, the storage area for the number of storage areas (number of addresses) to be initialized from the start address of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized, which is predetermined in the RAM initialization data table, is the initialization data. It is initialized.

When it is determined in the step of Sd20 that the number of remaining addresses is not larger than 0, that is, when all the predetermined areas of the RAM 41c specified based on the RAM initialization data table are initialized, the value of the predetermined register (D). Is subtracted by 1 to subtract 1 from the value indicated by the number of divisions in the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized (Sd21), and it is determined whether or not the value indicated by the number of divisions after subtraction is 0 (Sd22). If the value indicated by the number of divisions is not 0, the process returns to the step of Sd15, and based on the value indicated by the number of divisions, the number of storage areas to be initialized next is acquired from the RAM initialization table to be initialized. It is set in the predetermined register (B) as the number of addresses in the area, and the value of the start address corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions in the predetermined register (D) is acquired from the RAM initialization table and specified as the initialization target RAM address. After setting to the register (C) (Sd15), the initialization data (for example, 0) is set to the predetermined register (A) (Sd16), and the number of addresses in each process of the steps Sd16 to Sd20 becomes 0. By repeating the process up to, the storage area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions of the storage area of the predetermined register (D) is initialized. By repeating each process in the steps Sd15 to Sd22 until the number of divisions of the storage area becomes 0, the predetermined storage area of the RAM 41c designated by the number of divisions is initialized. Then, when the value indicated by the number of divisions in the storage area of the predetermined register (D) becomes 0, the AT state management process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. The data related to the control in the advantageous section includes the data related to the control of the AT state, and the predetermined area in which the data related to the control in the advantageous section in the RAM 41c is stored by the advantageous section data initialization process. By initializing, the data related to the control in the advantageous section and the data related to the control of the AT state are initialized, and the advantageous section is terminated and the AT state is terminated.

In this embodiment, in the advantageous section data initialization process, the initial value of the number of sections is set to 2, and the storage area in the predetermined two sections in the RAM 41c is initialized. However, the advantageous section data initialization process is used. The RAM 41c may be configured to initialize a predetermined storage area of one division or a storage area of three or more divisions.

As described above, in the AT state management process, when the advantageous section end flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c when the advantageous section is controlled, the storage area of the RAM 41c is included with the end of the control of the advantageous section. The advantageous section data initialization process for initializing the predetermined area in which the data related to the control in the advantageous section is stored is executed, and the control of the advantageous section is controlled to be terminated.

Further, the main control unit 41 sets an advantageous section end flag indicating that the advantageous section is terminated in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c when the arbitrary end condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied in the above-mentioned ball ejection control process. .. Then, in the AT state management process, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed when the advantageous section end flag is set by referring to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the advantageous section end flag is set by the ball ejection control process. It is executed to end the control of the advantageous section, while if the advantageous section end flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, and the number of advantageous section games is determined. When it is determined that the maximum number of games has been reached, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed to end the control of the advantageous section, and the arbitrary end condition is satisfied in the ball ejection control process. In that case, by referring to the advantageous section end flag, it is possible to omit the determination of whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit game number and end the control of the advantageous section. There is.

In the AT state management process, it is advantageous whether or not the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment) when controlled in the advantageous section. Judgment is made based on the value of the section game number counter, and when the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section end flag is not set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the advantageous section data is initially set. It is controlled so that the control of the advantageous section is terminated by executing the conversion process. The end condition of the advantageous section is replaced with the end condition established when the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment). It may be an end condition that is satisfied when the number exceeds the number of games obtained by subtracting 1 from the upper limit number of games (1499 in this embodiment).

In this embodiment, when the arbitrary end condition is satisfied in the ball ejection control process, the advantageous section end flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and then the advantageous section end flag is set in the AT state management process. Based on the above, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed to control so as to end the control of the advantageous section, while in the AT state management process, the number of games controlled in the advantageous section is predetermined. When the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied by reaching the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed without setting the advantageous section end flag, and the control of the advantageous section is terminated. However, even when the arbitrary end condition is satisfied in the ball ejection control process, the number of games controlled in the advantageous section in the AT state management process reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games, so that the advantageous section Even when the end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section end flag may be set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the advantageous section data initialization process may be executed based on the setting of the advantageous section end flag. ..

In the AT state management process, when the advantageous section end flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit game number, or when the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. , The advantageous section data initialization process is performed to initialize the data related to the advantageous section (including the data related to the AT state), thereby ending the advantageous section.

In the AT state management process, when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section is terminated. By setting the specified number to the specified number, it is advantageous over the specified number of games at the maximum. The slot machine 1 can be designed so that the payout rate of medals in the section is within a predetermined ratio. For example, the specified number of medals is 2388 (the maximum number of medals (15) to be paid out in the slot machine 1 is subtracted from the maximum number of 2400 medals, and the maximum number of medals (3) used to set the number of bets is added. ), The net increase in the number of medals to be paid out in the advantageous section can be set to 2400 or less, and the payout rate of medals between 1600 games can be set to 150% or less. As a result, it is possible to prevent the slot machine 1 from paying out an excessive number of medals in a predetermined period. In addition, instead of the termination condition established when the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined predetermined number (2388 in this embodiment), the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section is The same applies to the case where the end condition is set by reaching the number of sheets (2389 in the case of this embodiment) obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number of sheets. In addition, the end condition of the advantageous section is replaced with the end condition established when the net increase number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined predetermined number (2388 in this embodiment), and is paid out in the advantageous section. The end condition may be set when the net increase in the number of medals reached reaches the number obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number of medals (2389 in this embodiment).

In the AT state management process, when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, or when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section is terminated. When the number of advantageous section games reaches the maximum number of games, by ending the advantageous section, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from continuing for a long period of time, and the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is the specified number. By ending the AT state and the advantageous section when the number exceeds, even if the number of advantageous section games does not reach the upper limit game number, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from continuing when the payout rate suddenly increases. It has become like.

In the AT state management process, when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games and the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed to end the advantageous section. First, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games (Sd5), and if it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, the net increase in medals in the advantageous section. Advantageous section data initialization processing (Sd13 to Sd22) without performing processing for counting the number of sheets (Sd6 to Sd10) and processing for determining whether or not the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number (Sd11). I do. As a result, when it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied because the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit, the net increase in the number of medals, which is also the condition for ending the advantageous section, is the specified number. Since the process of determining that the number of medals exceeds (Sd11) and the process of counting the net increase in the number of medals initialized with the end of the advantageous section (Sd6 to Sd10) are not performed, the processing load can be reduced.

In the AT state management process of this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games (Sd5), and it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of games in the advantageous section has not reached the upper limit, it is determined whether or not the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. The process (Sd11) is performed. First, it is determined whether or not the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, and if it is determined that the net increase exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section is determined. On the other hand, if it is determined that the net increase number does not exceed the specified number, the configuration may be such that it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games. In such a configuration, as a condition for ending the advantageous section in the design of the slot machine 1, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number as compared with the number of games in the advantageous section reaching the upper limit. In a configuration in which is likely to be satisfied, it is possible to preferentially determine whether or not the net increase in the number of medals, which is an end condition that is likely to be satisfied, exceeds the specified number, and when the end condition is satisfied, the other end. The processing load can be reduced without determining the conditions.

In the AT state management process, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games (Sd5), and if it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has not reached the upper limit number of games, it is in the advantageous section. It is determined whether or not the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the specified number (Sd11), and if it is determined that the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the specified number, advantageous section data initialization processing (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed, which is advantageous. While controlling to end the section, if it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit, a process (Sd11) for determining whether or not the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the specified number is performed. Instead, the advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed to control the end of the advantageous section, the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit, and the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is increased. Even if either one of the exceeding the specified number is established or both of them are established in the same game, the common advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed to end the advantageous section. Let me. As a result, even if the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit of the number of games and the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number as the end condition of the advantageous section, either one is satisfied at the same time. The advantageous section can be terminated by performing the advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) in which the same region is initialized without any difference from the case where only the case is established.

In the AT state management process, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games (Sd5), and if it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has not reached the upper limit number of games, it is in the advantageous section. It is determined whether or not the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the specified number (Sd11), and if it is determined that the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the specified number, advantageous section data initialization processing (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed, which is advantageous. While controlling to end the section, if it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit, a process (Sd11) for determining whether or not the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the specified number is performed. The configuration is such that the advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed to end the advantageous section, and even when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is achieved. Even if the number of sheets exceeds the specified number, the common advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed to end the advantageous section. As a result, the common advantageous section data is established regardless of whether the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games or the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number as the end condition of the advantageous section. Since the initialization process is performed, the advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) in which the same region is initialized without any difference can be performed to end the advantageous section.

In the AT state management process, in the process of updating the net increase number counter of medals, the value of the net increase number counter is acquired in a predetermined register as the net increase number value, the payout number value is added to the net increase number value, and the bet value is subtracted. If the value obtained is less than 0, the value of the net increase counter is corrected to 0, so that the number of medals increased or decreased is decreasing as shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B. When it is smaller than the reference value (value of net increase number at the start of advantageous section (initial value 0)), the value of the net increase number counter becomes 0, and when the increase / decrease number of medals tends to increase, it tends to increase. The increased / decreased number of sheets since then becomes the value of the net increase number of sheets counter.

For example, as shown in FIG. 16A, after the shift to the advantageous section, the navigation notification is not performed and the increase / decrease number of medals tends to decrease, and the increase / decrease number is added to the net increase number counter to increase the number of medals. When the value of the counter is lower than the initial value (0 in this embodiment), the value of the net increase number counter becomes 0 for the period when the increase / decrease number of medals is lower than the initial value. After that, when the number of medals is increased or decreased by being controlled to the AT state and the stop operation is performed according to the navigation notification, the value of the net increase counter is the value corresponding to the net increase of medals ( The value obtained by subtracting the bet value from the payout number value) is sequentially added and updated. As a result, the value of the net increase number counter is based on the increase / decrease number of medals when the increase / decrease number of medals changes from a decreasing tendency to an increasing tendency, that is, when the increasing / decreasing number of medals becomes the lowest value. It is designed to indicate the number of sheets increased from the value.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 16B, after the increase / decrease number of medals once exceeds the initial value of the net increase number counter, it tends to decrease and falls below the initial value (0 in this embodiment) again. If this is the case, the number of medals will be 0 for a period of time when the number of medals is less than the initial value. After that, as the increase / decrease number of medals tends to increase, the value of the net increase number counter is updated by sequentially adding the value for the net increase number of medals (the value obtained by subtracting the bet value from the payout number value). As a result, the value of the net increase number counter is set to a value indicating the increase number from the reference value, with the increase / decrease number of medals when the increase / decrease number of medals becomes the lowest value as a reference value. ..

In the AT state management process, the calculated value obtained by subtracting the bet value in the game from the net increase counter value after adding the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase counter value in the advantageous section is 0. If it is larger than, the value obtained by adding the payout number value to the net increase number counter value and subtracting the bet value is set in the net increase number counter and updated, while if the calculated value is smaller than 0, the value is updated. By performing the process of setting 0 to the net increase number counter and updating each game, if the net increase number becomes a negative value in the advantageous section, the net increase number counter is corrected to 0 and the net increase number count is counted again from 0. Since the net increase number counter is updated so as to start the above, it is possible to directly specify the increase width (net increase number) of medals in the transition of the actual medal increase / decrease number in the advantageous section as the net increase number counter value (FIG. 16 (a)). )reference).

In this embodiment, by performing a process of updating the net increase number counter during the advantageous section, counting of the net increase number of medals is started from the time of shifting to the advantageous section, and the net increase during the advantageous section is started. Although the configuration is such that the number of sheets is counted, the process of updating the net increase number counter is not performed when the number of sheets is not in the AT state during the advantageous section, and the process of updating the net increase number counter is performed when the number of sheets is in the AT state during the advantageous section. good. Even with such a configuration, the net increase in the number of medals does not increase when the navigation notification is not performed in the AT state, and the net increase in the number of medals increases when the navigation notification is performed in the AT state. Similar to the configuration in which the process of updating the net increase number counter is performed while the number of medals is medium, the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section can be counted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, for example, after the transition to the advantageous section, in the period when the navigation notification is not performed, the prize with a payout rate exceeding 1 does not occur, and the increase / decrease number of medals is the reference value. If it changes to fall below, the number of medals will increase or decrease from the game in which the game shifts to the advantageous section and then shifts to the AT state and the navigation notification is started, and the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section in the game concerned. Is the least. It should be noted that even during the period when the navigation notification is not performed after the shift to the advantageous section, a prize with a payout rate of more than 1 may occur. If a prize with a payout rate of more than 1 occurs in the period so that the increase / decrease in the number of medals in the period tends to increase monotonically, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section will be increased in the game shifted to the advantageous section. The least. In addition, if a prize with a payout rate of more than 1 occurs during the period so that the number of medals increased or decreased once falls below the standard value and then the number of medals increases or decreases tends to increase, during the period. In the game, the net increase in the number of cards in the advantageous section is the smallest. In this way, the time point at which the net increase in the number of sheets is the smallest in the advantageous section may change depending on the situation. On the other hand, in the process of updating the net increase number counter of medals, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment acquires the value of the net increase number counter as a net increase number value in a predetermined register and pays out to the net increase number value. If the value obtained by adding the numerical value and subtracting the bet numerical value is less than 0, the value of the net increase number counter is corrected to 0 in the game in which the increase / decrease number of medals changes from a decreasing tendency to an increasing tendency. , The net increase number counter is reset, and the net increase number value is counted from 0 again. From the time when the net increase number is the smallest in the advantageous section, the net increase number is counted and the accurate net increase number is counted. You can do it.

Further, in this embodiment, by performing a process of updating the net increase number counter during the advantageous section, counting of the net increase number of medals is started from the time of shifting to the advantageous section, and the net increase during the advantageous section is started. Although it is configured to count the number of sheets, it may be configured to perform a process of updating the net increase number of sheets counter regardless of whether or not it is an advantageous section. In such a configuration, if the net increase in medals tends to increase in the section before the transition to the advantageous section, the net increase in medals in the section is taken over and the net increase in medals in the advantageous section is counted. Can be done.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate can be set to 1 or more by performing the stop operation in the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R notified by the navigation notification. , The medal payout rate is less than 1 by performing the stop operation in an operation mode other than the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R notified by the navigation notification. By following the navigation notification, the number of medals increased / decreased tends to increase, while the number of medals increased / decreased tends to decrease in states other than the AT state. Therefore, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be lit in the AT state. As a result, it is notified that the number of medals increased or decreased in the advantageous section is the period in which the number of medals increases or decreases.

In this embodiment, in the AT state management process, when the advantageous section end flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is the specified number. In any case, the advantageous section is set by performing the common advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) and initializing the data related to the advantageous section (including the data related to the AT state). In the configuration to end, that is, in the AT state management process, regardless of the end condition of the established advantageous section, the common advantageous section data initialization process is performed to uniformly initialize the data related to the advantageous section and end the advantageous section. However, at the end of the advantageous section, the data regarding the advantageous section corresponding to the end condition of the established advantageous section may be initialized and the advantageous section may be terminated.

In this embodiment, the number of medals actually paid out as a result of the game in the advantageous section is added to the net increase number counter to count the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section. If the predetermined small winning combination with the payout is won, the predetermined small winning combination wins and the medal is paid out regardless of whether or not the predetermined small winning combination is actually paid out as a result of the game. It may be configured to count the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section by adding the medals to be paid out to the net increase number counter on the assumption that the medals have been paid out. In such a configuration, when a predetermined small winning combination is won in an internal lottery in an advantageous section, it is considered that the predetermined small winning combination has won and the medals have been paid out, and the number of medals to be paid out is counted as a net increase number counter. Therefore, by intentionally missing the predetermined small winning combination, it is possible to prevent the net increase number counter from exceeding the specified number and intentionally extending the number of games in the advantageous section.

In addition, when the predetermined small winning combination is won in the internal lottery, the predetermined small winning combination wins and the medal is awarded regardless of whether or not the predetermined small winning combination is actually paid out as a result of the game. In the configuration where the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is counted by assuming that the medals have been paid out and adding the medals for the amount to be paid out to the net increase number counter, a lottery including a small winning combination with the payout of medals in the internal lottery. If the target role is won, regardless of whether or not the player can reliably win the small role, if the small role wins, it will be paid out by winning the small role. In addition to adding the medals for the number of medals to the net increase counter, if the lottery target winning combination including the small winning combination with the payout of medals is won in the internal lottery, the player can surely win the small winning combination. If the medal cannot be won despite the situation, for example, the navigation target role is won as the lottery target role in the internal lottery, and the stop switches 8L and 8C are advantageous for the player by the navigation notification. , The operation mode of 8R is notified, so that the predetermined small winning combination included in the navigation target combination can be won a prize, but the operation mode is different from the notified operation mode. If the specified small winning combination cannot be won, or if the specific small winning combination is won and the operation is performed in a certain operation mode (operation at the operation timing within the pull-in range of the specific combination, etc.), the specific small combination must be operated. It is possible for a player to win a medal when a specific small winning combination cannot be won by being operated in an operation mode other than a certain operation mode even though it is possible to win a medal. By assuming that the small winning combination has won and the medals have been paid out, and adding the medals to be paid out to the net increase number counter, the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section is counted, while the internal lottery If a lottery target winning combination including a small winning combination with a medal payout is won and the player cannot reliably win the small winning combination, for example, an internal lottery. In a situation where the navigation target role is won as the lottery target combination and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, which is advantageous for the player by the navigation notification, is not notified, the predetermined small combination included in the navigation target combination is selected. If it is not possible to win a prize, it is preferable to have a configuration that does not add to the net increase number counter, and by such a configuration, the player can surely increase the number of medals. If this is not possible, the net increase counter will be added only when the number of medals actually increases, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 updates the net increase number counter in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 adds the value for the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase number counter and sets the bet number. If the calculated value obtained by subtracting the value of the medals used in is less than 0, the value of the net increase number counter is corrected to 0, so that the increase / decrease number of medals is 0 in the net increase number counter. When the value is lower than 0, the value less than 0 is not counted, and only the value higher than 0 is counted. However, the main control unit 41 initializes the net increase counter to 0 by the start of the advantageous section, and then counts the value. In the advantageous section, when the medals are paid out, the value for the number of paid out medals is added to the net increase counter, and when the medals are used to set the number of bets, the value for the number of medals is added. By repeating the process of subtracting from the net increase number counter to count the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section, the number of medals increased or decreased may be less than 0 or more than 0. In such a configuration, when the increase / decrease number of medals is less than 0, the net increase number counter is not corrected to 0, so that the process of counting the net increase number by the net increase number counter can be simplified.

In this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 updates the net increase number counter, the main control unit 41 adds the value corresponding to the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase number counter, and the medal used for setting the bet number. If the calculated value obtained by subtracting the value of is less than 0, the value of the net increase number counter is corrected to 0, and if the calculated value is 0 or more, the calculated value is changed to the net increase counter. By controlling so as to update the value of the net increase number counter so as to be the value of, the net increase number of medals is counted starting from the time when the net increase number of medals decreases most after the start of the advantageous section. Since the timing at which the net increase in medals decreases most after the start of the advantageous section can change depending on the situation, the starting point of the net increase in medals specified based on the net increase counter in this embodiment depends on the situation. However, the main control unit 41 starts counting the net increase in the number of medals by the net increase counter from the time when the trigger is uniformly set after the start of the advantageous section, and the trigger is set. The advantageous section may be terminated when the net increase in medals up to the present starting point is counted and the net increase in medals exceeds the specified number.

For example, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals up to the present starting from a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, and when the net increase in medals exceeds the specified number of medals, the advantageous section As a configuration to end, the count by the net increase number counter is started from the time when the normal section is changed to the advantageous section, and the net increase number of medals up to the present starting from the time when the normal section is changed to the advantageous section is the specified number of medals. If it exceeds the limit, the advantageous section may be terminated. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase of medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and the net increase of medals starting from the time other than the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is set. Since it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the above, it is possible to simplify the control of determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the net increase number counter.

Further, for example, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals up to the present starting from a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, and when the net increase in medals exceeds the specified number. As a configuration for ending the advantageous section, when it is suggested that the AT state has been entered by the advantageous section notification LED 12a after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, and the operation mode for increasing the medals is notified by the navigation notification, When the net increase in the number of medals up to now, which is the starting point, exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section may be terminated and the normal section may be transferred. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase number of medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section notification LED 12a makes the advantageous section. Since it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase number of medals starting from the time other than when it is suggested that the transition has been made and the operation mode for increasing the number of medals is notified by the navigation notification, the net increase number is not required. It is possible to simplify the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the counter.

Further, for example, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals up to the present starting from a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, and when the net increase in medals exceeds the specified number. As a configuration for ending the advantageous section, it is suggested that after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section notification LED 12a shifts to the AT state regardless of whether or not the operation mode for increasing medals is notified by the navigation notification. When the number of medals to be increased from the starting point to the present exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section may be terminated and the normal section may be transferred. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase number of medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, the operation of increasing the medals by the navigation notification is performed. Regardless of whether or not the mode has been notified, it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase in medals starting from the time other than when the advantageous section notification LED 12a indicates that the advantageous section has been started. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the net increase number counter.

In this embodiment, in the AT state management process, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, so that the advantageous section is controlled to end. However, in the AT state management process, a bet is made in each game. The advantageous section is terminated when the total number of medals to be paid out in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined specified number by counting only the number of medals to be paid out in each game without counting the number of medals used to set the number. It may be configured to be controlled in such a manner. For example, the specified number of total payouts is 2865 (net increase number (2400) in which the payout rate of medals between 1600 games is 150%) and the shortest number of games (160 games = 2400/1) to which the net increase number of medals is given. From the total value of the number of medals used to set the number of bets (480 = 160 games x the specified number of 3 per game) in the maximum number of payouts per game (15)), the payout in one game on the slot machine 1 As a value obtained by subtracting the maximum value (15) of the number of sheets), when the total number of medals paid out in the game in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section is terminated. The maximum net increase in the number of medals to be paid out in is 2400 or less, and the payout rate of medals between 1600 games can be 150% or less. It should be noted that the same effect can be obtained even if the total number of medals paid out in the game in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (specified number + 1) to end the advantageous section.

[About medal payout processing]
The control content of the medal payout process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the medal payout process, first, the winning flag set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired in the predetermined register (Se1), and the winning number / payout number command setting process is performed (Se2). In the winning number / payout number command setting process, the winning combination specified based on the winning flag set and acquired in the predetermined register is paid out according to the winning combination that can identify the winning combination and the winning combination. Set the command queue to send a command that can specify the number of medals to the sub-control unit 91. The commands set in the command queue are sequentially transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by the timer interrupt process.

After performing the winning number / payout number command setting process in the step of Se2, the number of medals to be paid out in connection with the winning of the winning combination specified based on the winning flag acquired in the step of Se1 is acquired (Se3). ), The number of medals to be paid out is set as the remaining number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Se4).

After that, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of sheets set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is 0 (Se5), and if it is determined that the remaining number of sheets is not 0, it is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c and is currently set. Refer to the credit counter that can specify the number of credits (Se6), and determine whether or not the credit has reached the upper limit (50 in this embodiment) based on the value of the credit counter (Se7). ..

If it is determined in the step of Se7 that the credit has not reached the upper limit, the value of the credit counter is added by 1 (Se8), and the medal payout process is performed (Se9). In the medal payout processing, data for displaying the value corresponding to the value of the credit counter based on the value of the credit counter is set in the output buffer of the credit display 11, and is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The process of subtracting 1 from the remaining number of medals, the number of medals that have been set in the predetermined area of RAM 41c and have been paid out is added by 1 to the number of identifiable medals that have been paid out, and the value corresponding to the number of medals that have been paid out after the addition is displayed. The process of setting the data to be set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is performed. The initial value of the number of paid medals is 0, and the number of paid medals is initialized at the end of one game.

After performing the medal payout processing in the step of Se9, the credit payout interval waiting process is performed (Se10). In the credit payout interval waiting process, a predetermined waiting time (in this embodiment, a time during which the player or the like can visually recognize the change in the display contents of the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12, for example, one medal It waits for about 0.16 seconds for each payout, etc.), and when the waiting time elapses, the credit payout interval waiting process is completed. By performing the credit payout interval waiting process, the timer interrupt process is performed during the predetermined waiting time, and the display mode of the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 corresponds to the data set in each output buffer. It will be updated to the display mode. Further, the value of the credit counter updated by the medal payout processing and the number of paid medals are displayed on the credit display 11 and the game assist display 12 for at least a predetermined waiting time, and the credit display 11 and the game assist are displayed. A player or the like can visually recognize a change in the display content of the display device 12.

After performing the credit payout interval waiting process in the step of Se10, the process returns to the step of Se5, and each process of the steps of Se5 to Se10 is repeated until the remaining number of sheets set in the RAM 41c becomes 0. Then, in the step of Se5, when it is determined that the remaining number of sheets is 0, the medal payout process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

Further, when it is determined in the step of Se7 that the credit has reached the upper limit number based on the credit counter, the hopper payout process is performed (Se11). In the hopper payout process, the hopper motor of the hopper unit 35 is driven, and each time the payout sensor of the hopper unit 35 detects the payout of one medal, the remaining number of medals set in the RAM 41c is subtracted by 1 and paid out. After adding 1 to the number of medals, the process of setting the data for displaying the value corresponding to the number of paid medals after the addition in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is repeated until the remaining number becomes 0. .. As a result, every time a medal is paid out from the hopper unit 35, the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 is updated. Then, when the remaining number of sheets becomes 0, the hopper motor is stopped and the hopper payout process is completed.

After performing the hopper payout process in the step of Se11, the medal payout process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

In this way, in the medal payout process, when a small winning combination is won, if there is a vacancy in the credit, the number of medals to be paid out with the winning of the small winning combination is added to the credit within the range up to the upper limit of the credit. When there is no vacancy in the credit, the number of medals that could not be added to the credit is paid out from the hopper unit through the medal payout outlet 9.

In addition, in the medal payout process, a small winning combination is generated, and when paying out medals to credits, every time one medal is added to the credits, the medal payout process is performed and the number of paid medals is displayed. After setting the data to be generated in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, the timer interrupt processing is performed by performing the credit payout interval waiting process, and the data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. The control to update the display of the game auxiliary display 12 based on the data and maintain the display on the game auxiliary display 12 in the updated state until a predetermined waiting time elapses is controlled by the number of medals paid out to the credit. Repeat. As a result, when a small winning combination is generated and medals are paid out to credits, the number of medals paid out on the game auxiliary display 12 is sequentially displayed over a predetermined time (number of medals paid out to credits x waiting time). Will be updated.

Further, in the medal payout process, when a small winning combination is generated and the medal is paid out from the hopper unit, the hopper payout process is performed and a predetermined time according to the number of medals to be paid out (for example, 100 ms per medal). Data for displaying the number of medals that have been paid out is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 every time the hopper motor of the hopper unit 35 is driven and the payout sensor detects the payout of one medal. do. Then, the timer interrupt process is performed during the time corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out, so that the display of the game auxiliary display 12 is updated based on the data set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. Therefore, the display of the number of medals to be paid out on the game auxiliary display 12 is sequentially updated over a period of time according to the number of medals to be paid out.

[Processing when replaying is activated]
The control content of the process at the time of replay operation performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the process at the time of re-game operation, first, the winning flag set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to (Sf1), and whether or not the re-game combination has won a prize based on the winning flag is determined. Judgment (Sf2).

When it is determined that the re-game combination has won a prize in the step of Sf2, a re-game operation flag that can specify that the re-game is to be activated in the next game is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf3), and the re-game is used. The medal counter setting process is performed (Sf4). In the replay medal counter setting process, the specified number of bets in the game is specified, and the specified number of bets in the game is set as the replay medal in the replay medal counter set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The minute value (3 in this embodiment) is set.

After performing the replay medal counter setting process in the step of Sf4, the lighting mode of the LED 20 during replay is set to the lighting state (Sf5), and the interrupt one-time wait process is performed (Sf6). By performing the interrupt one-time wait process in the step of Sf6, the timer interrupt process is executed, the LED dynamic display process is performed, and the LED 20 is controlled to be in the lit state during replay.

After performing the interrupt one-time wait process in the step of Sf6, the process at the time of replay operation is terminated and the process returns to the main process. If it is determined in the step of Sf2 that the re-game combination has not won a prize based on the winning flag, the re-game operation process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

As described above, in the process at the time of replay operation, when the replay combination wins a prize in the game, the LED 20 during replay is controlled to be lit.

In addition, in the process at the time of re-game operation, when the re-game combination wins in the game, the re-game medal is set in the re-game medal counter, so that the re-game is used at the start of the game start waiting process in the next game. The medals are set as the number of bets, the specified number of bets is set, and the game can be replayed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
The control content of the timer interrupt process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

The timer interrupt process is a process performed by the main control unit 41 at regular time intervals (about 0.56 milliseconds in this embodiment). The execution interval of the timer interrupt process is set to a time longer than the total time of the time in which the process repeated according to the control state in the main process completes and the execution time of the timer interrupt process, and this time and the next time. The process that repeats according to the control state always goes through at least one cycle with the timer interrupt process.

As shown in FIG. 19, the timer interrupt process includes the LED dynamic display process, and each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the LED dynamic display process is executed.

In the LED dynamic display processing, various LEDs and other indicators connected to the output port (credit display 11, game auxiliary display 12, 1 to 3 BETLED 14 to 16, input request LED 17, start effective LED 18, wait LED 19, replaying). Control to set a lighting signal to dynamically turn on the lighting state of (LED20, etc.) according to the state of the output buffer set by each processing such as main processing, and send it to the lighting control circuit of the display of various LEDs, etc. And so on. By performing the LED dynamic display processing, the display devices such as various LEDs are controlled to the lighting mode according to the data set in the corresponding output buffer.

Although not shown in particular, the timer interrupt process of this embodiment is mainly used for a power failure determination process for detecting the occurrence of a power failure (power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped) and a power failure determination process for detecting the occurrence of a power failure. The data set in the register of the control unit 41 and the predetermined area of the RAM 41c are backed up by the backup power supply, and even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, the stored contents are saved as long as the power is supplied by the backup power supply. A power interruption process for saving to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, a process for initializing a predetermined output port when a power failure occurs, and data that can specify the detection status of various switches based on the detection status of various switches are generated. Processing, processing to update predetermined various timers set in the predetermined area of RAM 41c, processing to transmit a predetermined external output signal to the outside of the slot machine 1, processing to transmit various commands set in the command queue, game. A process of transmitting an excitation signal to the reel motor 32 of the reel unit 34 to drive and stop each reel according to the progress of the reel unit 34 is included, and various processes are executed in a predetermined order. There is.

[Transition of display mode of game auxiliary display, etc. at the start of advantageous section]
After the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, when the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied and the advantageous section notification is started, the game auxiliary display 12, the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the input request LED 17, the replaying LED 20, 1 The transition of the display mode of the 3BETLEDs 14 to 16 will be described with reference to FIG.

The main control unit 41 executes the above-mentioned main process, and performs the game start waiting process and the ball ejection control process. Therefore, at the start of the game, the game auxiliary display 12, the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the input request LED 17, and the replay are in progress. The display modes of LEDs 20, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 are sequentially controlled.

As shown in FIG. 20A, in the game start waiting process, when there is a vacancy in the credit or the number of bets and the medal can be inserted, the insertion request LED 17 is started to light. After that, the number of bets is set by inserting medals or operating the MAXBET switch 6, so that the corresponding 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are sequentially started to light. Then, when the specified number of bets is set, the start effective LED 18 is started to light. If the replaying combination is won in the previous game and the replaying game is given, the LED 20 during replay is controlled to be lit during the period from the end of the previous game to the end of the game (not shown). ).

In this state, the start switch 7 is operated to start the game and perform an internal lottery. Then, in the ball ejection control process, the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied and the advantageous section notification flag is set, so that the state control data (lighting) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, and then an interrupt is performed. By performing the wait process once, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started to light.

Then, after the interrupt one-time wait process is performed, the navigation for displaying the navigation number suggesting the operation mode according to the navigation target combination won in the internal lottery by the instruction setting process during the ball ejection control process. The display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. After that, by performing timer interrupt processing, each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 corresponding to the navigation number (3 in this embodiment) (in this embodiment, the first, third, and fourth of the left display 12L) , 6 and 7 segments and the 4th segment of the right display 12R) are started to light. That is, after the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started, the lighting of each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 indicating the navigation number is started.

Then, after the ball ejection control process is completed, the reel control process is performed, and after the wait elapses, that is, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the previous game, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate. Will be started.

Further, the main control unit 41 transmits a command capable of specifying the operation mode suggested by the navigation notification to the sub control unit 91 when performing the navigation notification in the instruction setting process during the ball ejection control process. Control to do. On the other hand, when it is specified that the navigation notification is performed on the main control unit 41 side at the start of the game, the sub control unit 91 is based on the command received from the main control unit 41. , The control of the navigation effect is executed, and the navigation image suggesting the operation mode suggested by the navigation notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, the sub control unit 91 may be controlled to the effect that the advantageous section notification is started, that is, in the AT state when it is specified that the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started on the main control unit 41 side. The AT confirmation notification for notifying the confirmation is performed using the liquid crystal display 51 or the like. Since the instruction setting process on the main control unit 41 side is performed after the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started, the navigation effect by the sub control unit 91 is performed after the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started. Will be.

In this way, the main control unit 41 controls to start lighting the advantageous section notification LED 12a when the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied in the ball ejection control process performed at the start of the game, so that the advantageous section notification start. At the start of the game in which the conditions are satisfied, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started to light up, and the advantageous section notification is started to notify that the advantageous section is controlled.

Further, in the ball ejection control process, the main control unit 41 controls to start displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 after starting the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, thereby starting the game auxiliary display. By the time the navigation notification is started in 12, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started to light up to notify that the advantageous section has started.

Further, in the ball ejection control process, the main control unit 41 controls the game auxiliary display 12 to start the navigation notification, and then performs the reel control process to control the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. After the game is started in response to the operation of the start switch 7, the game auxiliary display 12 starts the navigation notification until the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are controlled to rotate at a constant speed.

In this embodiment, in the ball ejection control process, after setting the state control data (lighting) in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the interrupt one-time wait process is performed to start lighting the advantageous section notification LED 12a. After that, the instruction setting process is performed to start the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display. However, in the ball ejection control process, after the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started to light up, the subsequent processing is predetermined. It is also possible to perform a delay process intentionally delaying over a predetermined period of time, and when the predetermined period elapses, perform an instruction setting process to start the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12. In such a configuration, within a predetermined period during which the delay processing is being performed, the sub-control unit 91 can be made to perform AT confirmation notification to notify that the control to the AT state is confirmed. After the AT confirmation notification is performed, the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 can be started.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to start lighting the advantageous section notification LED 12a in the ball ejection control process, then perform an instruction setting process to start the navigation notification. After starting the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a in the ball control process, the instruction setting process is performed in the reel control process, and when the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, the navigation notification is controlled to be started. But it's okay. In such a configuration, at the start of the game in which the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied, a predetermined period of wait, that is, a predetermined fixed period from the start of the previous game elapses after the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started. At that time, the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 will be started. When the predetermined period of the wait has elapsed at the start of the game in which the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are operated at substantially the same time as the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started to light. As the rotation starts, the navigation display of the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 starts.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to control the game auxiliary display 12 to start the navigation notification after starting the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a in the ball ejection control process. The main control unit 41 is configured to start lighting the advantageous section notification LED 12a at the start of the game in which the notification start condition is satisfied, but the main control unit 41 is navigating on the game auxiliary display 12 in the game in which the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied. At a predetermined timing from the start of notification to the end of the game (for example, when the third stop operation is completed, when the payout of medals is completed, when the granting of replay is completed, etc.) The lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a may be started.

In the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 is configured to perform AT confirmation notification when the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started on the main control unit 41 side, but the sub control unit 91 is the main control unit. In the game in which the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started on the 41 side, the AT confirmation notification may be performed at a timing before the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started on the main control unit 41 side. .. Further, it was confirmed that the sub control unit 91 was transferred to the advantageous section based on the command received from the main control unit 41 and then won the AT lottery, so that the advantageous section notification was started thereafter. Even in a configuration in which AT confirmation notification is performed at any timing within the period from the time when it is specified to the time when the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied on the main control unit 41 side, that is, the timing before the AT state is started. good.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to start lighting the advantageous section notification LED 12a at the start of the game in which the navigation notification is started, but after it is determined to shift to the AT state, the navigation notification is performed. The lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a may be started before the game in which the game is started. In this case, the sub control unit 91 may also be configured to perform AT confirmation notification at the timing when the main control unit 41 starts lighting the advantageous section notification LED 12a after it is determined to shift to the AT state.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to start the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 after starting the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, but the main control unit 41 is configured to start the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12, for example. In the control process, after setting the state control data (lighting) in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the interrupt one-time wait process is not performed, and then the instruction setting process is performed by the time the timer interrupt process is performed. By configuring the navigation display data of the navigation notification to be set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, as shown in FIG. 20B, when the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied. In addition, the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a and the display of the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 may be started at the same time. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to start lighting the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the time the navigation notification is performed in the advantageous section to notify that the advantageous section is controlled.

[Transition of display mode of game auxiliary display, etc. at the end of advantageous section]
The transition of the display modes of the game auxiliary display 12, the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the input request LED 17, the replaying LED 20, and the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 at the end of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22.

When the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the small winning combination is won in the internal lottery, and the small winning combination shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section, and the symbol combination of the small winning combination is reel 2L, 2C, 2R. Regarding the case of stopping, the timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended will be described with reference to FIG. 21 (a).

As shown in FIG. 21A, when the game is started in the advantageous section, the small winning combination is won in the internal lottery, the reel control process is performed, and the rotation of at least one reel is controlled, the game is played. The auxiliary display 12 (excluding the eighth segment of the right side display 12R), the input request LED 17, the start effective LED 18, the wait LED 19, and the replay LED 20 are controlled to be turned off. On the other hand, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be lit. If the replaying combination is won in the previous game and the replaying game is given, the LED 20 during replay is controlled to be lit during the period from the end of the previous game to the end of the game (not shown). ).

Then, after the stop switch pressing operation related to the third stop operation is completed (the stop switch is released) and the rotation of all reels is stopped, the reel control process is completed, and then the AT state is reached. Management processing is performed. In the AT state management process, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed on the condition that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated, and the game section is transferred from the advantageous section to the normal section. Also, the advantageous section notification flag is cleared.

After performing the AT state management process, the medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, the combination of symbols of the small winning combination is stopped at the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a predetermined number (for example, 9) of medals are paid out when the small winning combination is won. , The number of medals paid out is controlled to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. As a result, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is sequentially updated so as to be counted up to the final value indicating a predetermined number of pieces according to the winning small winning combination. Until the final value of the number of medals paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the waiting time for paying out medals to credits or the predetermined time for paying out a predetermined number of medals from the hopper unit is set. It will be necessary.

Then, when the payout of a predetermined number of medals according to the winning small winning combination is completed, the medal payout process is completed, and the process of setting the state control data in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is performed in the main process. Will be. In this process, the state control data (off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a based on the fact that the advantageous section notification flag is cleared in the above-mentioned AT state management process, and then the timer interrupt process is performed. Is performed, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off.

After that, the game end time setting process is performed, so that the main process for the game is completed, and then the game start waiting process for the next game is performed.

Then, in the medal care permission setting process of the game start waiting process, it is determined that there is a vacancy in the number of bets or credits, and the medal care permission flag is set, so that the flow path switching solenoid 30 takes in the medal inside. Is set to the ON state, and then the ON request LED 17 is set to the ON state. After that, the timer interrupt process is performed to start lighting the ON request LED 17. Further, in the game start waiting process, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is enabled by the operation input acceptance process.

In this way, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the small winning combination is won by the internal lottery, and the small winning combination shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section, and the symbol combination of the small winning combination is reel 2L. In the case of stopping at 2C and 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is completed, and the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C and 2R is stopped, so that the reel control process is completed. , The final value of the number of medals to be paid out in connection with the winning of the predetermined small winning combination by the medal payout process is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and then the status control data (turns off) is displayed in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process. Is set, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. As a result, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended. Further, after that, the lighting of the input request LED 17 is started from the game start waiting process.

Further, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the small winning combination is won in the internal lottery, and the small winning combination shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section, and the symbol combination of the small winning combination is reel 2L, 2C. When stopping at 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is terminated, and the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, so that the reel control process is terminated, and then the main reel is stopped. By the processing, the state control data (turning off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. Then, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is enabled by the operation input acceptance processing of the game start waiting process that is performed thereafter. That is, in the period from when the reel is stopped in the game until the acceptance of the settlement operation becomes effective, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended.

Next, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the small winning combination is won in the internal lottery, and the small winning combination shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section, and the missed symbol combination of the small winning combination is reel 2L. Regarding the case of stopping at 2C and 2R, the timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended will be described with reference to FIG. 21 (b).

As shown in FIG. 21B, when the game is started in the advantageous section, the small winning combination is won in the internal lottery, the reel control process is performed, and the rotation of at least one reel is controlled, the game is played. The auxiliary display 12 (excluding the eighth segment of the right side display 12R), the input request LED 17, the start effective LED 18, the wait LED 19, and the replay LED 20 are controlled to be turned off. On the other hand, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be lit.

Then, after the stop switch pressing operation related to the third stop operation is completed (the stop switch is released) and the rotation of all reels is stopped, the reel control process is completed, and then the AT state is reached. Management processing is performed. In the AT state management process, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed on the condition that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated, and the game section is transferred from the advantageous section to the normal section. Also, the advantageous section notification flag is cleared.

After performing the AT state management process, the medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, the small winning combination won in the internal lottery is dropped, and the winning with the medal payout does not occur, so that the medal payout control and the control to update the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 are not performed. It ends in. At this time, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is maintained in the extinguished state.

Then, after the medal payout process is completed, the state control data (off) is transferred to the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a based on the fact that the advantageous section notification flag is cleared by the AT state management process in the main process. After the setting, the timer interrupt process is performed, so that the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off.

After that, the game end time setting process is performed, so that the main process for the game is completed, and then the game start waiting process for the next game is performed.

Then, in the game start waiting process, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to the ON state so as to take in the medals, provided that there is a vacancy in the number of bets or credits, by the medal care permission setting process of the game start waiting process. After that, the on-request LED 17 is set to ON, and the on-off request LED 17 starts lighting. Further, in the game start waiting process, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is enabled by the operation input acceptance process.

In this way, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the small winning combination is won in the internal lottery, and the small winning combination shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section, and the missing symbol combination of the small winning combination is reel 2L. In the case of stopping at 2, 2C and 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is terminated, and the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C and 2R is stopped, so that the reel control process is terminated. After that, the state control data (off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main processing without controlling the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 to be updated by the medal payout process, and the advantageous section notification is performed. The LED 12a is turned off. As a result, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended. After that, the lighting of the input request LED 17 is started from the game start waiting process.

Further, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the small winning combination is won in the internal lottery, and the small winning combination shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section, and the missed symbol combination of the small winning combination is reel 2L, 2C. In the case of stopping at 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is terminated, and the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, so that the reel control process is terminated, and then the reel control process is terminated. The state control data (off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. Then, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is enabled by the operation input acceptance processing of the game start waiting process that is performed thereafter. That is, in the period from when the reel is stopped in the game until the acceptance of the settlement operation becomes effective, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended.

Further, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the small winning combination is won in the internal lottery, and the small winning combination shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section, and the missed symbol combination of the small winning combination is reel 2L, 2C. In the case of stopping at 2R, after the reel control process is completed, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is not controlled to be updated by the medal payout process, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is output by the main process. The state control data (off) is set in the buffer, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. On the other hand, as described above, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the small winning combination is won in the internal lottery, and the small winning combination shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section. Is stopped at reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, after the reel control process is completed, the final value of the number of medals to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the small winning combination by the medal payout process is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. After that, the state control data (turning off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. That is, the timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off depends on the case where the missing symbol combination of the small winning combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R and the case where the small winning combination symbol combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. different.

Even if the missed symbol combination of the small winning combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, or the symbol combination of the small winning combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is used by the main processing. By setting the state control data (turning off), the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off, and the processing timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off is the same. However, when the missed symbol combination of the small winning combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, after the reel control processing is completed, the number of medals to be paid out is not controlled to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and the main is not performed. While the state control data (off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the processing, when the symbol combination of the small winning combination is stopped at the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel control processing is terminated. Further, after the control for displaying the number of medals paid out on the game auxiliary display 12 is performed, the state control data (off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process. The time interval from the end of the reel control process until the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off is different, and the time timing when the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off is different.

Next, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, for example, a lottery target combination including the re-game combinations A and B is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section. , When the symbol combination of the re-gaming combination A or the re-gaming combination B stops on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended is based on FIG. 22. explain. It should be noted that the re-gaming combinations A and B are re-gaming combinations having a configuration in which the symbol combinations constituting the combination are different for at least one reel. Further, by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first operation order, the constituent symbols of the replaying combination A are preferentially stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped. By operating in the second operation order other than the first operation mode, the reel stop control is performed so that the constituent symbols of the replaying combination B are preferentially stopped by the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. ing.

As shown in FIG. 22, the game is started in the advantageous section, and after the lottery target combinations including the re-game combinations A and B are won in the internal lottery, the reel control process is performed. When the reel control process is performed and at least one reel is rotation-controlled, the game auxiliary display 12 (excluding the eighth segment of the right side display 12R), the input request LED 17, the start effective LED 18, and the weighting The LED 19 and the LED 20 during replay are controlled to be turned off. On the other hand, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be lit.

Then, after the press operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is completed (the press of the stop switch is released) and the rotation of all reels is stopped, the reel control process is completed, and then the AT state is reached. Management processing is performed. In the AT state management process, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed on the condition that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated, and the game section is transferred from the advantageous section to the normal section. Also, the advantageous section notification flag is cleared.

After performing the AT state management process, the medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, when the symbol combination of the re-game combination A or the symbol combination of the re-game combination B stops on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, a control for paying out medals and a control for updating the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 Is terminated without being performed. At this time, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is maintained in the extinguished state.

Then, after the medal payout process is completed, the replay operation time process is performed, a predetermined value is set in the replay medal counter, the replaying LED 20 is set to ON, and the replaying LED 20 is lit. Is started.

After that, in the main process, the state control data (off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a based on the fact that the advantageous section notification flag is cleared by the AT state management process, and then the timer interrupt process is performed. By doing so, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off.

After that, the game end time setting process is performed, so that the main process for the game is completed, and then the game start waiting process for the next game is performed.

Then, in the game start waiting process, the number of bets up to the specified number is set by 1 based on the fact that the re-game medal counter is set to 1 or more, and 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are sequentially set to the ON state. Then, the lighting of the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 is sequentially started. After that, in the medal care permission setting process of the game start waiting process, it is determined that there is a vacancy in the number of bets or credits, and the medal care permission flag is set, so that the flow path switching solenoid 30 takes in the medal inside. Is set to the ON state, and then the ON request LED 17 is set to the ON state. After that, the timer interrupt process is performed to start lighting the ON request LED 17.

In this way, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the lottery target combination including the re-game combinations A and B is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section occurs. When the symbol combination of the re-game combination A or the symbol combination of the re-game combination B is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is terminated, and all the reels 2L, 2C. By stopping the rotation of 2R, after the reel control process is completed, the process at the time of replay operation is performed and the lighting of the LED 20 during replay is started, and then the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started by the main process. The state control data (turns off) is set in, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. As a result, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended. Further, after that, the lighting of the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 is sequentially started from the game start waiting process, and then the lighting of the input request LED 17 is started.

Further, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the lottery target combination including the re-game combination A and B is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the re-game is performed when the advantage section shifts to the normal section. When the symbol combination of the combination A or the symbol combination of the replay combination B is stopped at the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, after the reel control process is completed, the replaying LED 20 is started to light by the process at the time of replay operation. After that, the state control data (turning off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. That is, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off even when the symbol combination of the replaying combination A is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R and when the symbol combination of the replaying combination B is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. The timing is common.

[Control status related to AT]
A control state (ball ejection state) relating to the AT controlled by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 23.

As shown in FIG. 23, the main control unit 41 can control the AT to a non-AT state or an AT state as a control state related to the AT. Regardless of whether the above-mentioned game state is controlled in the non-internal, internal, or special state (BB general, RB), when the above-mentioned game section is controlled in the normal section, only the non-AT state is set. Control. Further, even when the gaming state is controlled to either a non-internal middle state or a special state (BB general, RB) and the gaming section is controlled to an advantageous section, only the non-AT state is controlled. On the other hand, when the gaming state is controlled internally and the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section, it is controlled to either the non-AT state or the AT state.

Further, the AT state includes a non-hold state in which the hold control described later is not performed by the main control unit 41 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a normal AT state) and a hold state in which the hold control is performed. In the first hold state (hereinafter, may be referred to as a false precursor state) in which hold control is performed and addition control described later is not performed, hold control is performed and addition control can be performed. The second hold state (hereinafter, may be referred to as a precursor state and an additional state) is included. The main control unit 41 controls the control state for each AT so as to shift to the corresponding control state when the transition condition described later is satisfied.

The main control unit 41 is subject to the AT lottery target combination in the internal lottery on the condition that the game section is controlled to the advantageous section and the game state is controlled internally (in this embodiment, the push order is small). When the combination 1 to 6, the specific small combination 1, the specific small combination 2, or the replaying combination) is won, whether or not to control the AT state and when controlling to the AT state, the navigation notification is executed in the AT state. It is possible to perform an AT lottery that determines the number of times, that is, the number of games (hereinafter, may be referred to as the number of navigation games), and by winning the AT lottery, a predetermined number of navigation games are given and the game shifts to the AT state. Control to make it.

In the AT lottery, when the AT lottery is performed when the specific small winning combination 1 and the specific small winning combination 2 having a lower probability of winning in the internal lottery than the other internal lottery target winning combinations are won. , It is decided to control the AT state at a higher rate than when the winning of other internal lottery target roles is used as an opportunity. As a result, when the symbol combination of the specific small winning combination 1 and the specific small winning combination 2 is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R as a result of the game, the other symbol combinations are stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. It is suggested that the AT lottery may have been won at a high rate.

Further, in the AT lottery, when the AT lottery is performed with the winning of the specific small winning combination 2 having a lower probability of winning in the internal lottery than the specific small winning combination 1 among the winning combinations of the AT lottery, the winning of the specific small winning combination 1 is performed. It has come to be decided to control the AT state at a higher rate than when it is performed with the above as an opportunity. As a result, when the symbol combination of the specific small winning combination 2 is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R as a result of the game, the symbol combination of the specific small winning combination 1 is higher than when it is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. It is suggested that the AT lottery may have been won at a rate.

On the condition that the control state related to AT is controlled to the AT state, the main control unit 41 wins the additional state lottery target combination (in this embodiment, the specific small combination 1 and the specific small combination 2) in the internal lottery. When this is done, it is possible to perform an additional state lottery that determines whether or not to control the additional state (second hold state) in which the number of navigation games can be added. By winning the additional state lottery, the additional state can be obtained. Perform migration control to transition to.

In the additional state lottery, when the additional state lottery is performed with the winning of the specific small winning combination 2 having a lower probability of winning in the internal lottery than the specific small winning combination 1 among the additional state lottery target combinations, the specific small winning combination 1 It is decided to control the additional state at a higher rate than when the winning is triggered. As a result, when the symbol combination of the specific small winning combination 2 is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R as a result of the game, the symbol combination of the specific small winning combination 1 is higher than when it is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. It is suggested that there is a possibility that the additional status lottery has been won at a rate.

When the additional lottery target combination (in this embodiment, the push order small combination 1 to 6) is won in the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 is on the condition that the control state related to the AT is controlled to the additional state. , It is possible to perform an additional lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of navigation games and the number of navigation games when adding, and by winning the additional lottery, a predetermined number of navigation games will be added. Addition control is performed.

In the additional lottery, the lottery is performed using the lottery table according to the additional state lottery target combination that triggered the additional state lottery to be shifted to the second hold state, and the number of navigation games to be added is determined. When the additional state lottery target combination that triggered the additional state lottery is the specific small winning combination 1, the lottery table A is used, and the additional state lottery target combination that triggered the additional state lottery is the specific small winning combination 2. In some cases, the lottery table B is used. The lottery table B is set so that the average value of the number of navigation games determined to be added is higher than that of the lottery table A. For example, when the lottery table A is used, it is decided to add 20 games on average, and when the lottery table B is used, it is decided to add 40 games on average. There is.

In the predetermined area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, a navigation game number counter for counting the remaining number of the navigation games given by the AT lottery and the additional lottery is set. The main control unit 41 initializes the navigation game number counter when the AT state ends, that is, when the non-AT state starts. Then, when the number of navigation games is given by winning the AT lottery or the additional lottery, the addition process of adding the given number of navigation games to the number of navigation games counter is performed, while the internal lottery is performed in the AT state as described later. Each time the navigation target combination is won, the subtraction process is performed so that the value of the navigation game number counter is subtracted by 1, so that the remaining number of navigation games is counted.

Further, in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, an AT game number counter for counting the number of AT games continuously controlled in the AT state is set. When the AT state is started, the main control unit 41 initializes the value of the AT game number counter to 0. Then, the number of AT games is counted by controlling the value of the AT game number counter to be added by 1 each time the game is played in the AT state.

Further, in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, a hold game number counter for counting the remaining number of hold games for which hold control is performed is set. When the additional state lottery is performed, the main control unit 41 sets a predetermined number according to the result of the lottery in the hold game number counter, and if the lottery is not won, the first 1 Predetermined number of games (5 games in this embodiment) is set in the hold game number counter, and when the lottery is won, the second predetermined number of games (15 games in this embodiment) is set in the hold game number counter. Set to. Then, by controlling the value of the hold game number counter to be subtracted by 1 in each game in the hold state, the remaining number of hold games is counted.

In each game in the hold state, the main control unit 41 controls so that the subtraction process for subtracting the value of the navigation game number counter is not performed even if the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery. It is possible to perform hold control that does not update the value of the game number counter so as to approach the value that is the end condition of the AT state. By performing hold control in the hold state, the main control unit 41 sets the value of the navigation game number counter at the end of the hold state as the end condition of the AT state as compared with the value at the start of the hold state. It is possible to prevent updates that approach the value.

The hold state is controlled so that the value of the navigation game number counter at the end of the hold state is not updated so as to approach the value that is the end condition of the AT state as compared with the value at the start of the state. Anything may be used, and it may be controlled over a plurality of games, or may be controlled only in one game.

Further, the hold control of the present embodiment is configured to control so that the subtraction control for subtracting the value of the navigation game number counter is not performed in the hold state, but the hold control sets the value of the navigation game number counter in the AT state. Any configuration may be used as long as the configuration is controlled so that the value is not updated so as to approach the value that is the end condition. (For example, it may be performed at the start or end of the hold state), and during the hold state, the subtraction control of the navigation game number counter may be performed when the navigation target combination is won. Even in such a configuration, the value of the navigation game number counter at the end of the hold state should not be updated so as to approach the value that is the end condition of the AT state as compared with the value at the start of the state. Can be done.

When the main control unit 41 is controlling to the AT state, the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment), or the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is the second predetermined value. On condition that the value (2088 in this embodiment) is exceeded, a predetermined number of navigation games (in this embodiment, 100 games (about 200 AT games, about 600 net increase in medals)). )) Is specially given and added to the number of navigation games, and the AT state can be continued until the end condition (end condition 1 or end condition 2) of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the end of the advantageous section. By performing the ending control to end the AT state at the same time, it is possible to control the ending state (a state in which the AT state is continuously controlled until either the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied). Is.

In the ending state of this embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls the AT state based on the value of the navigation game number counter, but the special grant is performed in the ending control, so that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. The number of navigation games required for the AT state to be continued until is established is set in the navigation game number counter, and the state is continuously controlled to the AT state until the end clause of the advantageous section is established. Is. On the other hand, the ending state may be continuously controlled to the AT state until either the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied, regardless of the remaining number of navigation games. The control unit 41 said, on condition that the number of advantageous section games reached the first predetermined value or the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeded the second predetermined value while controlling to the AT state. After the condition is satisfied, the AT state may be continuously controlled regardless of the remaining number of navigation games until the end clause of the advantageous section is satisfied.

In the predetermined area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, a special grant flag that can specify whether or not the special grant of the number of navigation games has been performed is set by the ending control. The special grant flag is updated so that it can be specified that the special grant has been made when the special grant is given by the ending control, while it is initialized at the end of the advantageous section. It is updated so that it can be identified that no special grant has been made.

Next, a non-AT state and an AT state (non-hold state, first hold state, second hold state), which are control states related to AT, will be described.

The non-AT state is a state in which AT is not controlled and navigation notification is not performed. In the non-AT state, the main control unit 41 does not perform navigation notification even if the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, regardless of whether the game section is controlled to the normal section or the advantageous section. Since the navigation notification is not performed, the medal payout rate does not exceed 100% in the non-AT state.

Further, in the non-AT state, the AT lottery target combination in the internal lottery (in this embodiment, the push order), provided that the game section is controlled to the advantageous section and the game state is controlled internally. When the small winning combination 1 to 6, the specific small winning combination 1, the specific small winning combination 2, and the replaying combination) are won, the AT lottery is performed. The non-AT state is terminated at the end of the game that won the AT lottery by winning the AT lottery, the game shifts to the AT state, and the number of navigation games that are won and given by the AT lottery. Is added to the navigation game number counter.

Further, in the non-AT state, when the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section and it is not established that the gaming state is controlled internally, that is, the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section, but the game is played. If the state is controlled in the non-internal, or if the gaming section is controlled in the normal section and the gaming state is controlled in either the non-internal or the internal, the internal lottery is performed. Even if the AT lottery target combination is won, the AT lottery is not performed and the decision to control the AT state is not made. As a result, when it is controlled in the normal section or when it is controlled in the non-internal, it does not shift to the AT state and the navigation notification is not performed, so that the medal payout rate is 100. It is designed not to exceed%.

The AT state is a state in which AT is controlled and navigation notification is performed when a predetermined notification condition (a navigation target combination is won in an internal lottery) is satisfied. In the AT state, navigation notification is performed in each game in which the navigation target combination is won by the internal lottery, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the operation mode notified by the navigation notification to win the prize. It is possible to win an increasing role with an increasing number of medals among the winning roles included in the small winning combination. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in the operation mode notified by the navigation notification during the AT state, the payout rate of medals in the AT state exceeds 100% (for example, about 200%). It can be set to about 260% (3 to 5 net increase per game).

Further, in the AT state, after the above-mentioned game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section notification is controlled and the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started in the game in which the navigation notification is first performed. To. Then, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is continuously controlled to be lit until the advantageous section ends.

The non-hold state (normal AT state) included in the AT state is a state that is first controlled when the non-AT state is changed to the AT state. In the non-hold state, when the navigation target combination (in this embodiment, the push order small combination 1 to 6) is won in the internal lottery, the number of assigned navigation games is consumed by 1 and the navigation notification is performed. Is controlled by. Specifically, in each game, it is determined by an internal lottery whether or not the navigation target combination is won, and if the navigation target combination is won, the navigation notification is controlled and the navigation game number counter is performed. Subtraction control is performed. After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the navigation game number counter becomes 0, and if it is not determined that the value of the counter becomes 0, the AT state (non-hold state) is controlled to be maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the counter becomes 0, the AT state (non-hold state) is terminated and the game shifts to the non-AT state at the end of the game in which the value of the counter becomes 0. It will be controlled to the non-AT state from the next game.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to end the AT state (non-hold state) and shift to the non-AT state when the value of the navigation game number counter becomes 0. In such a configuration, when the AT state (non-hold state) is terminated at the end of the game in which the value of the navigation game counter becomes 0, the configuration is controlled so that the advantageous section is also terminated, that is, the end timing of the AT state. And the end timing of the advantageous section may be the same, or after the end of the game in which the value of the navigation game counter becomes 0, a predetermined end condition (for example, a specific symbol combination stops at reels 2L, 2C, 2R). Control is performed so that the advantageous section is also terminated by establishing (such as performing, a predetermined number of games being played, a specific winning combination being won by an internal lottery, a specific winning combination being won or winning a predetermined number of times, etc.). The configuration, that is, the configuration in which the end timing of the AT state and the end timing of the advantageous section may not match may be used. In the configuration in which the control is controlled so that the advantageous section is also terminated by satisfying the predetermined end condition after the end of the game in which the value of the navigation game number counter becomes 0, the predetermined condition is satisfied until the predetermined end condition is satisfied. By establishing (for example, winning a predetermined combination, winning an AT lottery triggered by the winning of a predetermined combination, etc.), the AT state can be controlled again to end the AT state. Later, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the AT state will be controlled again. Further, after the end of the game in which the value of the navigation game number counter becomes 0, it is controlled so that the advantageous section is also terminated by satisfying the predetermined end condition, and by the time the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the predetermined end condition is satisfied. In a configuration in which the AT state can be controlled again by satisfying the conditions, the sub-control unit 91 produces the effect on the liquid crystal display 51 using a predetermined background image to be displayed in the AT state even after the end of the AT state. By performing this, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the AT state will be controlled even in the games after the value of the navigation game number counter becomes 0.

Further, in the non-hold state, when the additional state lottery target combination (in this embodiment, the specific small combination 1 and the specific small combination 2) is won in the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not to shift to the additional state. An additional state lottery will be held. Then, if the player does not win in the additional state lottery and it is not decided to shift to the additional state, the non-hold state is temporarily interrupted at the end of the game in which the additional state lottery is performed. It shifts to the 1-hold state and is controlled to the 1st hold state from the next game. On the other hand, if the player wins the additional state lottery and decides to shift to the additional state, the non-hold state is temporarily interrupted and the second hold is held at the end of the game in which the additional state lottery is performed. It shifts to the state and is controlled to the second hold state from the next game. In the first hold state and the second hold state, the hold control is performed so that the subtraction process of the navigation game number counter is not performed, and whether or not the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery. Regardless of this, the value of the navigation game number counter is not updated so as to approach the value (0 in this embodiment) that is the end condition of the AT state.

The first hold state (false precursor state) included in the AT state is a state in which hold control is performed by the main control unit 41 and additional control described later is not performed, and the first predetermined number of games (in this embodiment). It is controlled over 5 games). In the first hold state, the hold control is performed, so that when the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, the navigation notification is performed, but the subtraction process of the navigation game number counter is not performed. Further, since the addition control in which the addition lottery is performed is not performed, the addition processing of the navigation game number counter is not performed. Therefore, the value of the navigation game number counter is maintained without being increased or decreased during the period from the start to the end of the first hold state.

Further, in the first hold state, the hold game number counter is decremented by 1 in each game, and at the end of the game in which the value of the hold game number counter becomes 0, the first hold state is terminated and the non-hold state is reached. It is transferred to, and it is controlled to the non-hold state from the next game. By being controlled to the non-hold state, the subtraction process of the navigation game number counter is performed when the navigation target combination is subsequently won in the internal lottery and the navigation notification is performed.

The second hold state (precursor state and additional state) included in the AT state is a state in which hold control is performed by the main control unit 41 and additional control of the number of navigation games can be performed, and the second predetermined number of games (the second predetermined number of games) ( In this embodiment, it is controlled over 15 games).

The second hold state is composed of a precursor state and an additional state, and when the non-hold state is changed to the second hold state, the second hold state is first controlled to the precursor state. The hold game number counter is subtracted by 1 in each game in the precursor state, and at the end of the game in which the value of the hold game number counter reaches a predetermined value (10 in this embodiment), that is, the game is shifted to the second hold state. After that, when the first predetermined number of games elapses, the game shifts from the precursor state to the added state, and is controlled from the next game to the added state. Then, even in each game in the added state, the hold game number counter is subtracted by 1, and at the end of the game in which the value of the hold game number counter becomes 0, that is, after shifting to the second hold state, the second predetermined number of games When is elapsed, the second hold state (additional state) is terminated, the game shifts to the non-hold state, and the game is controlled to the non-hold state from the next game. By being controlled to the non-hold state, the subtraction process of the navigation game number counter is performed when the navigation target combination is subsequently won in the internal lottery and the navigation notification is performed.

In the second hold state, both when controlled to the precursor state and when controlled to the additional state, the hold control is performed by the main control unit 41 in the same manner as in the first hold state. When the navigation target combination is won in the lottery, the navigation notification is performed, but the subtraction process of the navigation game number counter is not performed. Further, when the second hold state is controlled to the precursor state, the addition control in which the addition lottery is performed is not performed, so that the addition process of the navigation game number counter is not performed. Therefore, in the period from the start to the end of the precursory state in the second hold state, the value of the navigation game number counter is maintained without being increased or decreased.

Further, in the second hold state, the addition control of the number of navigation games is not performed when the control is performed in the precursor state, but the addition control of the number of navigation games may be performed when the control is performed in the addition state. In the additional state, when the additional lottery target combination (in this embodiment, the push order small combination 1 to 6 which is the navigation target combination) is won in the internal lottery, the additional number of navigation games (0 at the time of non-winning) is set. An additional lottery will be held to determine (including). Then, the number of navigation games won and given in the additional lottery is added to the number of navigation games counter, and the number of navigation games is added. Therefore, in the period from the start to the end of the additional state in the second hold state, the value of the navigation game number counter may be maintained without increase or decrease, or may be increased. Sometimes.

In this way, in the second hold state, the hold control is performed in the precursor state and the additional state, so that the number of navigation games is the same as in the first hold state during the period from the start to the end of the second hold state. Although the value of the counter is not decreased, the value of the number of navigation games can be maintained or increased without increasing or decreasing by performing the addition lottery in the addition state and controlling the addition of the number of navigation games. May be done.

Further, in the second hold state, the predetermined internal lottery target combination (pushing order 1 to 6 which is the navigation target combination) that triggers the navigation notification to be performed and the subtraction process is performed in the non-hold state is navigated by the internal lottery. By winning the target combination and the additional lottery target combination, the navigation notification is performed, but the subtraction process of the navigation game number counter is not performed, and by winning the additional lottery, the addition process of the navigation game number counter is performed. Will be done.

In the AT state, the main control unit 41 performs ending control to control the ending state by satisfying a predetermined condition based on the number of games in the advantageous section and the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section as described above.

Specifically, in each game in the AT state, the main control unit 41 refers to the advantageous section game number counter of the RAM 41c at the start of the game, and the current advantageous section game number is the first predetermined value (in this embodiment). 1400 games) is determined. Then, when the number of advantageous section games is the first predetermined value, that is, when it is specified that the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value in the game, the special grant flag is referred to and the special grant is given. A predetermined number of navigation games (in this embodiment, 100 games (about 200 AT games, net increase in medals) are controlled by controlling so as to give a special grant on condition that it is specified that the game has not been performed. By adding (for about 600 cards)) to the number of navigation games counter, the AT state will be continued until the upper limit of the number of advantageous section games for which the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is satisfied. Add the number of navigation games to and control to the ending state. In addition, when the special grant is made, the special grant flag is updated so that it can be specified that the special grant has been made.

Further, in each game in the AT state, the main control unit 41 refers to the net increase number counter of the RAM 41c at the end of the game, and the net increase number of medals in the current advantageous section is the second predetermined value (2088 pieces in this embodiment). ) Is exceeded. Then, when the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the second predetermined value, the special grant flag is referred to, and the special grant is controlled on condition that it is specified that the special grant has not been performed. , It is advantageous to add a predetermined number of navigation games (in this embodiment, 100 games (about 200 AT games, about 600 net increase in medals)) and add them to the navigation game counter. The number of navigation games is added so that the AT state is continued until the specified number of medals net increase for which the end condition 2 of the section is satisfied is reached, and the ending state is controlled. In addition, when the special grant is made, the special grant flag is updated so that it can be specified that the special grant has been made.

Further, when the main control unit 41 determines that the number of advantageous section games is not the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) in each game in the AT state, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is the second predetermined value. When it is determined that the value (2088 sheets in this embodiment) is not exceeded, the special grant flag is referred to, and when it is specified that the special grant has been performed, the ending control is controlled so as not to be performed. .. Keep the contents of the special grant flag without updating.

Further, at the end of the advantageous section, the main control unit 41 initializes the special grant flag by the advantageous section data initialization process, and is updated so that it can be specified that the special grant has not been performed.

As described above, in the ending control, in the AT state, the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment), or the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is the second predetermined value (this implementation). In the example, by granting a special number of navigation games on condition that the number exceeds 2088), the number of navigation games that is equal to or greater than the number of games of the difference from the current number of advantageous section games to the maximum number of games can be counted as the number of navigation games. By adding to the number of navigation games, or by adding the number of navigation games that can obtain a net increase of more than the difference from the current net increase of medals to the specified number, to the number of navigation games counter, then the end condition of the advantageous section It is controlled to continue the AT state until (end condition 1 or end condition 2) is satisfied, that is, until the advantageous section ends.

As described above, the main control unit 41 can control a plurality of types of AT-related control states, including a non-AT state and an AT state that is more advantageous to the player than the non-AT state. It is possible to control the AT state by digesting the number of navigation games (in the AT state) given by the lottery and the additional lottery.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to control the AT state for a period from the time when the number of navigation games is assigned until the remaining number of the navigation games becomes 0, that is, the navigation notification is executed. The configuration is such that the period for controlling the AT state is managed based on the number of times the game is played. In, the number of AT games is controlled to be subtracted by 1, and the AT state is controlled for a period from the time when the number of AT games is given until the remaining number of the AT games becomes 0, that is, the control is performed on the AT state. A configuration that manages the period for controlling the AT state based on the number of games to be played, the number of medals to be paid out in the AT state by the AT lottery and the additional lottery (total number of payouts or total net increase) is given to shift to the AT state. , Every time a medal is paid out or a bet number is set in a game in the AT state, the remaining number of medals to be paid out in the AT state is updated according to the number of payouts and the number of bets in the game. The number of medals to be paid out in the AT state (total number of medals to be paid out) is controlled to the AT state for a period from the time when the number of medals to be paid out in the AT state is given until the remaining number of medals becomes the end condition. Alternatively, a configuration may be used in which the period for controlling the AT state is managed based on the total net increase in the number of sheets).

Further, the main control unit 41 can notify the correct answer pressing order when the pressing order small winning combination whose operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that increases medals in the internal lottery changes is won. Navigation notification can be executed, and in the control of navigation notification, the correct answer pressing order can be notified in the AT state. In the AT state, the frequency of the correct answer pressing order being notified by the navigation notification is higher than in the non-AT state. This configuration is more advantageous to the player than the non-AT state.

Further, the main control unit 41 can control the AT state to be advantageous to the player, and can perform a subtraction process for reducing the remaining number of navigation games by winning the navigation target combination in the internal lottery in the AT state. Is. Further, in the AT state, when the remaining number of navigation games becomes 0, the AT state is terminated and the game shifts to the non-AT state.

Further, the main control unit 41 can perform hold control to control the number of navigation games to a hold state that does not decrease the number of navigation games even if the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery in the AT state, and the hold state is the first. A hold state and a second hold state are included.

Further, the main control unit 41 can control the first hold state and the second hold state as the hold state, and the first hold state is the case where the navigation target combination is elected by the internal lottery and the navigation notification is performed. By controlling not to perform the subtraction process of subtracting 1 from the navigation game number counter that counts the remaining number of navigation games, the remaining number of navigation games does not decrease, and even if the additional lottery target combination is won. By controlling so that the additional lottery is not performed, the remaining number of navigation games does not increase. Further, in the second hold state, when the navigation target combination wins in the internal lottery and performs navigation notification, the subtraction process of subtracting 1 from the navigation game number counter that counts the remaining number of navigation games is not performed. By controlling to, if the remaining number of navigation games does not decrease and the additional lottery target combination is won, an additional lottery is performed and the number of navigation games won in the additional lottery is added to the number of navigation games counter. By performing the addition process, the remaining number of navigation games can be increased.

Further, the main control unit 41 controls the control state after the first hold state is terminated and after the second hold state is terminated, before the control to the first hold state and the second hold state. It is controlled to the non-hold state (normal AT state) in which the control contents are common.

Further, the main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section and can control the AT state when the remaining number of navigation games is 1 or more, and the advantageous section counts the number of advantageous section games. It is equipped with a game number counter and a net increase number counter that counts the increased number of medals in the advantageous section, and even if the remaining number of navigation games is 1 or more, the advantageous section game counted by the advantageous section game number counter. AT also when either the end condition 1 that is satisfied when the number reaches the upper limit number of games or the end condition 2 that is satisfied when the net increase in the number of medals counted by the net increase counter exceeds the specified number is satisfied. Control to terminate the state.

Further, the main control unit 41 adds 1 to the advantageous section game number counter every time a game is played to count the number of advantageous section games even in the hold state, and net increases each time the medal is paid out even in the hold state. It is controlled to add the net increase in medals to the number counter and count the net increase in medals in the advantageous section.

Further, the main control unit 41 controls the second hold state out of the first hold state and the second hold state, starts the control of the second hold state, and after the first predetermined number of games has elapsed, the first 2 During the period until the predetermined number of games elapses, the number of navigation games is controlled to be added, and the additional lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery, so that the additional lottery is performed and the additional lottery is performed. The number of navigation games is added by adding the number of winning navigation games to the number of navigation games counter.

[About AT production]
The AT effect performed by the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 29.

The main control unit 41 can transmit various commands that can specify the control status on the main control unit 41 side to the sub control unit 91 according to the progress status of the game, for example, the game. A command that can specify the progress status of, a command that can specify the game section that is currently being controlled, a command that can specify the control state related to the AT that is currently being controlled, and a navigation that is notified by the navigation notification when performing navigation notification. A command that can specify the number, a command that can specify whether or not the above-mentioned special grant of the number of navigation games has been performed, a command that can specify the number of advantageous section games, a command that can specify the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section, etc. It is designed to transmit to the sub-control unit 91 according to the progress of the above.

On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 can control to perform various effects according to the progress status and the control state of the specified game based on the command received from the main control unit 41. For example, the main control unit 41 is controlled to perform an AT effect suggesting that the control state is controlled to the AT state for a period in which the control state related to the AT is controlled to the AT state, and the main control unit 41 is controlled to perform the AT effect. In the game in which the navigation notification is performed, the navigation effect for notifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R notified by the navigation notification is controlled.

Further, the sub control unit 91 has the end condition of at least one of the above-mentioned end condition 1 and end condition 2 for the advantageous section controlled by the main control unit 41 based on the command received from the main control unit 41 side. When it is specified that the situation is close to the establishment of the advantageous section, advance notification (notice of the end of the advantageous section) is performed to notify that the end condition of the advantageous section is near to be established over the period until the advantageous section is completed. Control.

The AT effect includes an AT effect (normal) that suggests that the main control unit 41 is controlled to the AT state, and an AT effect that suggests that the main control unit 41 is controlled to the AT state. An AT effect (ending) suggesting that the main control unit 41 is controlled to the ending state is included.

When it is specified that the sub control unit 91 is controlled to the AT state on the main control unit 41 side, the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment). If the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section does not exceed the second predetermined value (2088 in this embodiment), that is, the ending control has not yet been performed, and the Navistock is specially granted. If not, the AT effect (normal) is controlled until the start condition of the AT effect (ending) described later is satisfied. On the other hand, when it is specified that the main control unit 41 is controlled to the AT state, and the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment), or , When the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value (2088 in this embodiment), that is, the ending control is performed and the special grant of the navigation stock is performed, so that the AT effect ( After the start condition of the ending) is satisfied, the AT effect (ending) is controlled to be performed.

Further, the sub control unit 91 controls the navigation effect when it is specified that the navigation notification is performed on the main control unit 41 side during the AT effect (normal) or the AT effect (ending). Then, the liquid crystal display 51 is controlled to display a navigation image (see FIG. 7) that notifies the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R notified by the navigation notification.

Further, when the sub control unit 91 is specified to be controlled to the first hold state on the main control unit 41 side when the AT effect (normal) is performed, the sub control unit 91 performs the first hold effect described later. When it is specified that the state is controlled to the second hold state, the control is performed so as to perform the second hold effect described later. Then, both when the first hold effect is finished and when the second hold effect is finished, the control is performed so as to shift to the AT effect (normal).

Further, when it is specified that the sub control unit 91 is controlled to the ending state on the main control unit 41 side based on the command received from the main control unit 41 side (for example, the main control unit 91). The number of remaining AT games estimated based on the remaining number of navigation games on the control unit 41 side, that is, the sum of the number of advantageous section games that can be continued in the future and the current number of advantageous section games is the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. The sum of the net increase in medals that can be obtained in the future and the current net increase in medals, which is estimated based on the remaining number of navigation games, is the specified number of net medals in the advantageous section. When it is specified that the number exceeds the limit, etc.), an ending suggestion effect suggesting that the AT effect (ending) is started during the period over a predetermined number of games before being controlled by the ending on the main control unit 41 side is performed. It is possible to do.

The AT effect (normal) performed by the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIG. 24.

As shown in FIG. 24, in the AT effect (normal), the AT effect screen displayed when the main control unit 41 is controlled to the AT state is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to control the AT state. It suggests that it has been done. The AT effect screen is a main effect image (image of a predetermined character) which is a main effect composed of character images and the like, and a remaining navigation game number suggestion image (main in this embodiment) suggesting the remaining number of navigation games. A numerical image (for example, 50) showing the remaining number of navigation games specified based on a command received from the control unit 41 side, and a game history during AT (for example, the number of games played in the AT state, AT AT game history image suggesting the net increase number performed in the state, the number of times controlled in the AT state, the number of times controlled in the advantageous section, etc. (In this embodiment, the number of games controlled in the AT state (digestion during AT) It is displayed in a numerical image (for example, 500 games) showing the number of games), a numerical image showing the net increase in the number of medals in the AT state (net increase in the number of ATs) (for example, 1502), and the AT effect (normal). The background image A is mainly composed of the background image A. Further, on the AT effect screen, the credits stored in the slot machine 1, the number of medals to be paid out in the game, and the game are set in the same manner as the normal effect screen in the above-mentioned normal effect (not shown). An image showing the number of bets is displayed.

Next, the ending suggestion effect performed by the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIG.

Based on the command received from the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 is controlled to the AT state on the main control unit 41 side, and it is specified that it is confirmed that the sub control unit 91 is controlled to the ending state. In this case, the number of advantageous section games is the third predetermined value (1395 in this embodiment) before the predetermined number of games (5 games in this embodiment) from the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) described above. At the start of the game in which it is specified that the game has been reached, or the main control unit 41 is controlled to the AT state, and the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is the second predetermined value (in this embodiment). 2088) to the number of net increase corresponding to the predetermined number of games (5 games in this embodiment) (15 in this embodiment (5 games which is the predetermined number of games x 3 which is the average value of the net increase)) At the end of the game in which it is specified that the previous fourth predetermined value (2073 sheets in this embodiment) has been exceeded, the ending suggestion effect is started on condition that the ending suggestion effect has not been performed yet. Control.

As shown in FIG. 25 (a), in the ending suggestion effect, at the start of a game in which the AT state is controlled and it is specified that the number of advantageous section games has reached the third predetermined value, or the AT state. At the end of the game in which it is specified that the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the fourth predetermined value, the liquid crystal display 51 starts displaying the ending suggestion image. The display of the ending suggestion image is continued until the AT effect (ending) is started.

In the ending suggestion effect, when the ending suggestion effect is performed when the number of advantageous section games reaches the third predetermined value, the number of remaining games until the number of advantageous section games reaches the first fixed value is suggested. An ending suggestion image is displayed as an ending suggestion image that suggests that the AT effect (ending) is started depending on the progress of the numerical image and the number of remaining games, and the number of remaining games is counted down at each start of the game. Is updated (see FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b)). On the other hand, when the ending suggestion effect is performed when the net increase in medals exceeds the fourth predetermined value, a numerical image suggesting the remaining net increase until the net increase in medals exceeds the second predetermined value and the remaining. A message image suggesting that the AT effect (ending) is started by increasing the net increase number by the net increase number is displayed as an ending suggestion image, and an ending suggestion image is displayed so as to show the remaining net increase number at each end of the game. Update (not shown).

After that, as shown in FIG. 25B, it is specified at the start of the game in which it is specified that the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value, or that the net increase in medals exceeds the second predetermined value. At the end of the game to be played, that is, when the ending control is performed on the main control unit 41 side and the special number of navigation games is given, the ending confirmation notification that the control to the ending state is confirmed is notified. Is controlled so as to display the ending confirmation notification image on the liquid crystal display 51. In the ending confirmation notification image, the main control unit 41 is displayed by displaying a predetermined character image and a message image indicating that the AT effect (ending) is performed (in this embodiment, a character image of "ending GET !!"). It is confirmed that the ending state is controlled on the side, and the fact that the AT effect (ending) is performed is notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), the bet number for starting the next game is set in the state where the ending confirmation notification image is displayed, and the game is started by operating the start switch 7. When this is done, after ending the ending suggestion effect and the AT effect (normal), the AT effect (ending) is started and the ending start image is controlled to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In the ending start image, an AT effect (ending) is displayed by displaying a predetermined character image and a message image indicating that the AT effect (ending) is started (in this embodiment, a character image of "ending start !!"). ) Is started.

Then, the sub-control unit 91 displays the ending start image for a predetermined period (3 seconds in this embodiment), ends the display of the ending start image, and then ends the advantageous section. Along with this, control is performed so that the AT effect (ending) is performed until the AT state is terminated.

Next, the AT effect (ending) performed by the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIG. 26.

As shown in FIG. 26A, on the AT effect screen (ending), the main effect image, the remaining AT game number suggestion image suggesting the number of remaining games controlled by the AT state (advantageous section), the AT game history image, By displaying the AT effect screen composed of the background image D on the liquid crystal display 51, it is suggested that the AT state is controlled.

On the AT effect screen (ending), the main effect image (in this embodiment, the image of the predetermined character on the rocket) and the background image A, which are not displayed in the AT effect (normal) and the additional state effect described later, are displayed. Displays a background image D (an image of the celestial body D) having a different display mode. By displaying the main effect image and the background image D in a display mode different from the display modes in the AT effect (normal) and the added state effect, the player can recognize that the AT effect screen (ending) is performed. be. In addition, by performing the AT effect screen (ending), it is suggested that the ending control is performed on the main control unit 41 side and the special number of navigation games is given, and the number of advantageous section games is first predetermined. By reaching the value (1400 games in this embodiment), the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is near to be satisfied, and the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is the second predetermined value (2088 in this embodiment). Exceeding it suggests that the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is near to be satisfied. Further, by performing the AT effect screen (ending), it is suggested that the currently controlled AT state is continued until the end condition (end condition 1, end condition 2) of the advantageous section is satisfied. The display mode of the AT game history image is the same as the display mode in the above-mentioned AT effect (normal).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (b), in the remaining AT game number suggestion image on the AT effect screen (ending), the AT effect is triggered when the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value. When (Ending) is started, the numerical image so as to suggest the difference between the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section game for which the end condition 1 is satisfied and the current number of advantageous section games as the number of remaining AT games. Is displayed.

On the other hand, when the AT effect (ending) is started when the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the second predetermined value, a character image (for example, an image such as "?") That does not show a specific numerical value). Is displayed in place of a numerical image suggesting the number of remaining AT games (not shown). If the AT production screen (ending) is started when the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the second predetermined value, the number of games until the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied is uncertain. By not displaying a specific numerical value as a numerical image suggesting the number of remaining AT games, an inconsistency occurs between the number of remaining AT games suggested by the numerical image and the number of remaining AT games actually controlled. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

In the image suggesting the number of remaining AT games on the AT effect screen (ending), the net medal increase even when the AT effect (ending) is started when the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value. Even when the AT effect (ending) is started when the number of sheets exceeds the second predetermined value, the number of games or the estimated number of games until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied is also displayed. Alternatively, the number of games until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied may not be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26B, on the AT effect screen (ending), an ending state suggestion image (in this embodiment, a character image of "Congratulations!") Is displayed in the vicinity of the remaining AT game number suggestion image. This suggests that the ending state is controlled and the AT state is terminated with the remaining predetermined number of games.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), on the AT effect screen (ending), the advantageous section end notice image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as advance notification to notify that the end condition of the advantageous section is about to be satisfied. Therefore, the notice that the AT state is terminated when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied is given before the advantageous section is terminated and the AT state is terminated.

The advantageous section end notice image includes a number of games showing the difference between the current number of advantageous section games and the maximum number of games, and a number showing the difference between the current net increase in medals and the specified number of advantageous sections. An image and a character image suggesting that the AT state is terminated when the game is played for the number of games of the difference or the net increase in the number of medals is increased by the number of the difference are included. The advantageous section end notice image is displayed in the display area between the reels 2L, 2C, 2R and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R switches in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, and the game is played during the game. It is easy for people to recognize.

In addition, the advantageous section end notice image is controlled to blink and be displayed by alternately switching between a display state and a non-display state at predetermined time intervals. When the display state is displayed, the number of advantageous section games is controlled. While the player can recognize the difference number of games and the difference number of medals net increase, when the player is in the non-display state, the image on the rear side of the advantageous section end notice image (AT game history image in this embodiment). ) Can be recognized.

Further, in the blinking display control of the advantageous section end notice image, the closer the condition is that the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied, that is, the difference between the number of advantageous section games and the net increase in medals. As the number of differences decreases, the end condition 1 or end condition 2 of the advantageous section is far from being satisfied, that is, when the number of games of the difference in the number of games in the advantageous section and the number of differences in the net increase in medals are relatively large. The display state and the non-display state of the advantageous section end notice image are switched so that the display state time is long and the non-display state time is short. As a result, when the condition for ending the advantageous section is relatively close to each other, the image indicating the end of the advantageous section is highlighted and displayed.

In the AT effect (ending) of this embodiment, a character image or a background image different from the AT effect (normal) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to suggest that the ending state is set. In the staging (ending), a video or image peculiar to the ending state, for example, an animation video related to the content corresponding to the model of the slot machine 1 may be displayed to suggest that the ending state is in effect.

Next, a flow of control related to the game performed by the main control unit 41 and control related to the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 in relation to the AT effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 29.

As shown in FIG. 27, the main control unit 41 can control the game section to the normal section and the advantageous section while controlling the control state related to AT to the non-AT state and the AT state, and controls to the non-AT state. At that time, the winning combination for the advantageous section transition lottery is won in the internal lottery to perform the advantageous section transition lottery, and by winning in the advantageous section transition lottery, the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section. .. Then, when the non-AT state is controlled and the advantageous section is controlled, the AT lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery, the AT lottery is performed, and the AT lottery is won. After that, the predetermined number of games (in this embodiment, the number of games determined by lottery out of 3 to 5 games, and the period of AT precursor effect on the sub-control unit 91 side suggesting the possibility of winning the AT lottery). ) Elapses to control the transition to the AT state. Then, the AT state is continuously controlled until the remaining number of the assigned navigation games becomes 0, or until the end condition (end condition 1, end condition 2) of the advantageous section is satisfied.

On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 controls so as to perform the effect according to the control state regarding the AT controlled by the main control unit 41, and the main control unit 41 side is in the non-AT state. When controlled to, the above-mentioned normal effect is performed, and when controlled to the AT state, the above-mentioned AT effect (normal or ending) is controlled. Further, when the AT lottery is performed on the main control unit 41 side, an AT precursor lottery for determining whether or not to perform an AT precursor effect (not shown) suggesting the possibility of winning the AT lottery is performed, and the lottery is performed. By winning the game, the AT precursor effect is performed over a predetermined number of games (3 to 5 games in this embodiment) determined by lottery on the main control unit 41 side. In the AT precursor lottery, when the main control unit 41 has won the AT lottery, that is, when it is determined that the AT state is controlled, the rate of winning the AT precursor lottery is set to be high. It is suggested that there is a high possibility that the AT lottery has been won by performing the AT precursor staging.

Then, as shown in FIG. 28, when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, the main control unit 41 stops the third stop in the game when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games. When the operation of the switch is completed, that is, at the end of the game, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed to end the advantageous section and shift to the normal section, and the AT state is terminated to shift to the non-AT state. Let me.

On the other hand, in the case where the sub control unit 91 is controlled to the advantageous section on the main control unit 41 side and is controlled to the AT state, the number of advantageous section games is the first at the start of each game. It is determined whether or not the predetermined value, the third predetermined value, or the upper limit number of games has been reached.

Then, the AT effect (normal) is controlled until the start of the game in which the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value. When it is specified that the number of advantageous section games has reached the third predetermined value while the AT effect (normal) is being performed, the game specified that the number of advantageous section games has reached the third predetermined value. At the start of, the remaining number of navigation games is a predetermined number (a number corresponding to the difference between the third predetermined value and the first predetermined value of the advantageous section games, and the AT state is continued and the number of advantageous section games is the first. 1 The ending suggestion effect is started on condition that the number of navigation games that can reach a predetermined value is equal to or more than that, and the ending suggestion effect is performed while the AT effect (normal) is continuously performed. Then, at the end of the game immediately before the game in which the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value, the ending confirmation notification image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in the ending suggestion effect, and the AT effect (ending) is performed. Notify that it has been confirmed.

After that, when the start operation of the next game is performed, that is, at the start of the game in which the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value, the ending suggestion effect is ended and the ending start image of the AT effect (ending) is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is displayed on the display 51 to start the AT effect (ending). Further, at the start of the game in which the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value, the advantageous section end condition is satisfied by starting the advantageous section end notice as advance notification for notifying the subsequent end of the advantageous section in advance. Start notifying that it is near.

After that, at the start of the game in which the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, the notice of the end of the advantageous section (advance notification) is terminated. Then, at the end of the game in which the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, the result notification (not shown) for notifying the game result in the advantageous section is performed, and the game history in the AT state (the number of AT games, Net increase number) is suggested. In the result notification, for example, a character image, a numerical image showing the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section, and a numerical image showing the number of games controlled in the AT state are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to display the advantageous section (AT state). Notify the game result in.

Then, by operating the start switch 7 to start the next game while the result notification is being performed, the result notification is terminated and the normal effect is controlled from the start of the next game. do.

When the advantageous section is terminated by the satisfaction of the end condition 1 of the advantageous section, the sub-control unit 91 is at the end of the game in which the advantageous section is terminated, for example, when the result is notified. Notification of the establishment of the advantageous section end condition (for example, display of the message image of "the advantageous section has reached the upper limit (1500 games)") and the end condition of the advantageous section are satisfied. The fact that the advantageous section has been completed, such as the advantageous section-related information initialization notification (for example, the message image of "Initialized information related to navigation notification") that notifies that the information related to the advantageous section has been initialized. In addition, a configuration may be used in which post-notification is performed to post-notify information related to the end of the advantageous section. By performing the advantageous section-related information initialization notification as a post-notification, even if the advantageous section ends and the information related to the advantageous section is not taken over thereafter, the player may be dissatisfied or confused. Can be prevented.

Further, in the configuration in which the post-notification is performed, the post-notification may be performed only at the end of the game in which the advantageous section is ended, or a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous section (for example, a predetermined time (3 minutes or the settlement switch 10)). The operation may be performed over a predetermined number of games (for example, 3 games), the time until the operation is detected, the time until the demonstration effect is started), and the like. By performing the post-notification over a predetermined period, even if the player misses the initialization notification in the game in which the advantageous section ends, it is possible to surely recognize that the information regarding the advantageous section is not inherited thereafter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29, the main control unit 41 increases the number of medals in the advantageous section when the net increase in medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, that is, when the net increase in medals in the advantageous section reaches the specified number + 1 or more. In a game in which the number of medals exceeds the specified number, when the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop is completed, that is, at the end of the game, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed to end the advantageous section and the normal section is terminated. At the same time, the AT state is terminated and the non-AT state is shifted.

On the other hand, when the sub control unit 91 is controlled to the advantageous section on the main control unit 41 side and is controlled to the AT state, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is increased at the start of each game. It is determined whether or not the number exceeds any of the second predetermined value, the fourth predetermined value, and the specified number of sheets.

Then, the AT effect (normal) is performed until the start of the next game of the game in which the net increase in medals exceeds the second predetermined value, that is, the start of the next game in which the net increase in medals reaches the second predetermined value + 1. To control. When it is specified that the net increase in medals exceeds the fourth predetermined value, that is, when the net increase in medals reaches the fourth predetermined value + 1 while the AT effect (normal) is being performed, the relevant case is concerned. At the end of the game in which it is specified that the net increase in medals exceeds the 4th predetermined value, the remaining number of navigation games is a predetermined number (the number according to the difference between the 4th predetermined value and the 2nd predetermined value of the net increase in medals). Yes, the ending suggestion effect is started and the AT effect (normal) is continued on condition that the number of medals net increase is equal to or more than the number of navigation games that can reach the second predetermined value while continuing the AT state. While doing it, perform the ending suggestion production.

Then, at the end of the game in which the net increase in medals exceeds the second predetermined value, that is, the game in which the net increase in medals reaches the second predetermined value + 1, the ending confirmation notification image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in the ending suggestion effect. , Notifies that the AT production (ending) has been confirmed.

After that, when the start operation of the next game is performed, that is, at the start of the next game of the game in which the net increase in medals exceeds the second predetermined value, that is, the next game in the game in which the net increase in medals reaches the second predetermined value + 1. At the start of, the ending suggestion effect is ended, and the ending start image of the AT effect (ending) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to start the AT effect (ending). In addition, when the next game of the game in which the net increase in medals exceeds the second predetermined value is started, the advantageous section end notice is started as a preliminary notification to notify the subsequent end of the advantageous section in advance, and the end condition of the advantageous section is set. Start notifying that the establishment is near.

After that, in a game in which the net increase in medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop is completed and the payout of medals is completed, that is, the game in which the net increase in medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. At the end of, the notice of the end of the advantageous section (advance notice) is terminated. Then, as described above, when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit of the number of games, the game result in the advantageous section is notified at the end of the game, as in the case of ending the advantageous section end notice (advance notification). The result is notified (for example, the number of games controlled in the AT state, the display of an image suggesting the net increase in the number of medals acquired in the AT state (not shown), etc.) is performed, and the game history in the AT state (in the AT state). Suggests the number of games, net increase).

Then, by operating the start switch 7 to start the next game while the result notification is being performed, the result notification is terminated and the normal effect is controlled from the start of the next game. do.

When the advantageous section is terminated by the satisfaction of the end condition 2 of the advantageous section, the sub-control unit 91 is at the end of the game in which the advantageous section is terminated, for example, when the result is notified. Notification of the establishment of the advantageous section end condition (for example, display of a message image of "the net increase in the number of medals has exceeded the specified number (2388)") and the end of the advantageous section. The advantageous section ends, such as the advantageous section related information initialization notification (for example, the message image of "Initialized information related to navigation notification") that notifies that the information related to the advantageous section has been initialized due to the condition being satisfied. It may be configured to perform post-notification to post-notify the information related to the fact that the information has been done and the end of the advantageous section. By performing the advantageous section-related information initialization notification as a post-notification, even if the advantageous section ends and the information related to the advantageous section is not taken over thereafter, the player may be dissatisfied or confused. Can be prevented.

Further, in the configuration in which the post-notification is performed, the post-notification may be performed only at the end of the game in which the advantageous section is ended, or a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous section (for example, a predetermined time (3 minutes or the settlement switch 10)). The operation may be performed over a predetermined number of games (for example, 3 games), the time until the operation is detected, the time until the demonstration effect is started), and the like. By performing the post-notification over a predetermined period, even if the player misses the initialization notification in the game in which the advantageous section ends, it is possible to surely recognize that the information regarding the advantageous section is not inherited thereafter.

As described above, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment is from the start of the game in which the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value to the start of the game in which the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit. , And, from the end of the game in which the net increase in medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value, that is, from the end of the game in which the net increase in medals reaches the second predetermined value + 1, the net increase in medals subsequently increases the specified number. It is possible to give advance notice of the end of the advantageous section as advance notice until the end of the game that exceeds, that is, the end of the game when the net increase in the number of medals reaches the specified number +1, and the number of advantageous section games is the maximum number of games. Before the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is satisfied by reaching, or before the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied. It is possible to notify that the establishment of the above is near, and it is possible to recognize in advance that the advantageous section ends when the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied.

[About hold production]
The hold effect performed by the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 35.

As described above, the main control unit 41 has an additional state lottery target combination in the internal lottery on condition that the control state related to AT is controlled to the AT state (in this embodiment, the specific small combination 1 and the specific small amount). When the combination 2) is won, an additional state lottery is performed, and according to the lottery result of the additional state lottery, a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 5 games or 5 games or) from the next game of the game in which the additional state lottery is performed. 15 games), the first hold state or the second hold state is controlled. Further, when the internal lottery is performed, a command capable of specifying the lottery result of the internal lottery is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. Further, when the additional state lottery is performed, a command capable of specifying the lottery result of the additional state lottery is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. Further, when the first predetermined number of games (5 games in this embodiment) elapses from the time when the control of the first hold state or the second hold state is started based on the hold game number counter, and the second predetermined number. When the number of games (15 games in this embodiment) has elapsed, a command that can specify that the corresponding predetermined number of games has elapsed is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 is in a hold state (first) when it is specified that the additional state lottery has been performed based on the command received from the main control unit 41, that is, on the main control unit 41 side. When it is specified that control is performed in the hold state (second hold state), control is performed so as to perform a hold effect suggesting that the hold state is controlled.

In the control of the hold effect, the sub control unit 91 first sets the effect mode of the hold effect as a strong hold effect, which will be described later, based on the lottery result of the additional state lottery specified by the command received from the main control unit 41. An effect mode lottery is performed to determine whether the effect is a weak hold effect, which will be described later. In the staging mode lottery, the player wins in the additional state lottery, and when it is specified that the main control unit 41 determines that the control is to be controlled in the second hold state, the player wins in the additional state lottery. The effect mode of the hold effect is set to the strong hold effect at a higher rate than the case where it is specified that the control to the first hold state is determined on the main control unit 41 side. It is supposed to decide to do so. As a result, when the hold effect is performed in the effect mode of the strong hold effect, the main control unit 41 is controlled to the second hold state as compared with the case where the hold effect is performed in the effect mode of the weak hold effect. It has been suggested that there is a high possibility.

In the weak hold effect, as shown in FIG. 30 (a), at the start of the game in which the hold effect is performed (in this embodiment, when the start switch 7 is operated), it is suggested that the weak hold effect is first performed. The weak hold image (in this embodiment, the character image of "HOLD" and the white background frame image) is displayed relatively large in the central portion of the liquid crystal display 51. After that, as shown in FIG. 30B, the AT effect (normal) is performed while reducing the size of the weak hold image until the reel stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective in the game. Remaining number of navigation games Move in the direction of the suggested image. Then, as shown in FIG. 30 (c), the weak hold image is on the front side (player side) of the remaining navigation game number suggestion image until the reel stop operation in the game becomes effective, and the rest. By locating at least a part of the navigation game number suggestion image at a specific position that can be invisible from the player side, and displaying the weak hold image on top of the remaining navigation game number suggestion image, the remaining navigation Decreases the visibility of the game number suggestion image.

After that, the weak hold image is positioned at a specific position for a predetermined period (5 games or 15 games in this embodiment) until the end of the hold effect, and the weak hold image is placed on the front side of the remaining navigation game number suggestion image. It is controlled so as to reduce the visibility of the remaining navigation game number suggestion image for a predetermined period during the hold effect by maintaining the state of being superimposed on the image.

In the strong hold effect, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), at the start of the game in which the hold effect is performed (in this embodiment, when the start switch 7 is operated), it is suggested that the strong hold effect is first performed. The strong hold image (in this embodiment, the character image of "HOLD" and the black background frame image) is displayed relatively large in the central portion of the liquid crystal display 51. After that, as shown in FIG. 31 (b), the AT effect (normal) is performed while reducing the size of the strong hold image until the reel stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective in the game. Remaining number of navigation games Move in the direction of the suggested image. Then, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), the strong hold image is on the front side (player side) of the remaining navigation game number suggestion image until the reel stop operation in the game becomes effective, and the rest. By locating at least a part of the navigation game number suggestion image at a specific position that can be invisible from the player side, and displaying the strong hold image on top of the remaining navigation game number suggestion image, the remaining navigation Decreases the visibility of the game number suggestion image.

After that, the strong hold image is positioned at a specific position for a predetermined period (5 games or 15 games in this embodiment) until the end of the hold effect, and the strong hold image is placed on the front side of the remaining navigation game number suggestion image. It is controlled so as to reduce the visibility of the remaining navigation game number suggestion image for a predetermined period during the hold effect by maintaining the state of being superimposed on the image.

When the weak hold image is positioned at a specific position, the size in the vertical direction is displayed smaller than the image suggesting the number of remaining navigation games on the back side, and the weak hold image is displayed at the specific position. When there is, a part of the image suggesting the number of remaining navigation games can be visually recognized from the player side. On the other hand, when the strong hold image is positioned at a specific position, the size in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction is displayed larger than the image suggesting the number of remaining navigation games on the back side, and the strong hold image is specified. When displayed at the position, all of the remaining navigation game number suggestion images are invisible to the player. The strong hold image is displayed in a larger display mode than the weak hold image in the state of being positioned at a specific position, and the strong hold image is emphasized in the display mode as compared with the weak hold image. It suggests that it is controlled to the hold state. Hereinafter, the strong hold image and the weak hold image may be collectively referred to as a hold image when it is not necessary to distinguish them.

The hold effect is a first hold effect that suggests that the hold state is controlled when the main control unit 41 is controlled to the first hold state, and a second hold state is performed on the main control unit 41 side. Includes a second hold effect that suggests that the hold state has been controlled when controlled to.

In the control of the hold effect, after the effect mode lottery is performed to determine the effect mode of the hold effect, the first hold is performed according to the lottery result of the additional state lottery specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41. The effect or the second hold effect is controlled to be performed in the effect mode (strong hold effect, weak hold effect) determined by the above-mentioned effect mode lottery.

Specifically, when it is specified that the main control unit 41 is controlled to the first hold state without winning in the additional state lottery based on the command received from the main control unit 41, the additional state is added. The first hold effect is controlled to be performed in the effect mode determined by the effect mode lottery from the next game of the game in which the state lottery is performed to the first predetermined number of games (5 games in this embodiment). On the other hand, when it is specified that the game is won in the additional state lottery based on the command received from the main control unit 41 and the main control unit 41 controls to the second hold state, the additional state lottery is performed. From the next game of the game to the second predetermined number of games (15 games in this embodiment), the second hold effect is controlled to be performed in the effect mode determined by the effect mode lottery.

As shown in FIG. 32, when controlling to the first hold effect, the next game of the game in which the additional state lottery is performed at the start of the first hold effect, that is, on the main control unit 41 side as described above. At the start of, after displaying the hold image of the effect mode determined by the effect mode lottery at a specific position, until the end of the game in which the first predetermined number of games (5 games in this embodiment) elapses. The state in which the hold image is displayed at a specific position is maintained, and the visibility of the remaining navigation game number suggestion image on the back side of the hold image is reduced.

In addition, during the period when the first hold effect is being performed, the navigation target combination (in this embodiment, the push order small combination 1 to 6) is won by the internal lottery, and the navigation notification is performed on the main control unit 41 side. When it is called, it is controlled to perform a navigation effect suggesting the operation order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R notified by the navigation notification.

Then, after starting the first hold effect, a start operation for starting the next game of the game in which the first predetermined number of games has elapsed (operation of the start switch 7 with a predetermined number of bets set). Is performed to end the first hold effect and control the transition to the AT effect (normal) performed before the start of the first hold effect.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, when the second hold effect is controlled, the main control is performed at the start of the second hold effect, that is, as described above, as in the case of controlling the first hold effect. At the start of the next game of the game in which the additional state lottery is performed on the unit 41 side, the hold image of the effect mode determined by the effect mode lottery is displayed at a specific position. After that, until the end of the game in which the first predetermined number of games (15 games in this embodiment) elapses, the state in which the hold image is displayed at a specific position is maintained, and the number of remaining navigation games on the back side of the hold image. It reduces the visibility of the suggested image.

Then, after starting the second hold effect, the second hold effect is continued even after the next game of the game in which the first predetermined number of games has elapsed is started, and after the second hold effect is started, the second hold effect is started. The state in which the hold image is displayed at a specific position is maintained until the second predetermined number of games (15 games in this embodiment) has elapsed.

Further, when the next game of the game in which the first predetermined number of games has elapsed is started after the second hold effect is started, the second hold state is controlled and the addition is notified that the additional state is controlled. The state determination effect is performed using the liquid crystal display 51. In the addition state confirmation effect, as shown in FIG. 32 (d), the confirmation suggestion image (in this embodiment, the character image of "addition state confirmation") is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to win the addition lottery. This suggests that it is confirmed that the number of navigation games is controlled to the additional state that can be added.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b), the additional state effect suggesting that the additional state is controlled is started, the second hold effect is started, and then the second predetermined number of games is increased. Until the lapse of time, the additional state effect and the second hold effect are continued. In the additional state effect, the liquid crystal display 51 displays a main effect image (in this embodiment, an image of a predetermined character on a disk-shaped vehicle) that is not displayed in the above-mentioned AT effect (normal) and AT effect (ending). By displaying the image on the screen, it is suggested that the main control unit 41 is controlled to the additional state.

Further, in the control of the second hold effect, when it is specified that the number of navigation games has been added by winning the additional lottery based on the command received from the main control unit 41, the additional lottery is performed. At the end of the played game, it is possible to perform an additional effect that suggests the result of the additional lottery. In the additional effect, an additional image suggesting the number of navigation games to be added by winning in the additional lottery specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41 (in this embodiment, "addition + 10G GET !!" By displaying the character image) on the liquid crystal display 51, the number of added navigation games is suggested.

Further, in the control of the second hold effect, the additional effect is performed every time it is specified that the number of navigation games has been added by winning the additional lottery, but when each additional effect is performed, the additional lottery is used. The total number of navigation games given during the second hold effect is summarized when the second hold effect is terminated without adding the number of given navigation games to the number of navigation games in the image suggesting the number of remaining navigation games. It is controlled to update the remaining navigation game number suggestion image so as to add. In addition, every time the number of navigation games is given in the additional lottery, the number image of the remaining navigation game number suggestion image is controlled to be updated so as to add the number of navigation games given in each addition lottery. good.

In addition, during the period when the second hold effect is being performed, the navigation target combination (in this embodiment, the push order small combination 1 to 6) is won by the internal lottery, and the navigation notification is performed on the main control unit 41 side. When this happens, control is performed so as to perform a navigation effect suggesting the operation order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R notified by the navigation notification, as in the period during which the first hold effect is performed.

Then, after starting the second hold effect, a start operation for starting the next game of the game in which the second predetermined number of games has elapsed (operation of the start switch 7 with a predetermined number of bets set). Is performed to end the second hold effect and control the transition to the AT effect (normal) performed before the start of the second hold effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), the sub-control unit 91 is a period during which the first hold effect is performed and a period during which the second hold effect is performed, and is the first predetermined number of games (this implementation). In the example, in the period until 5 games) elapses (the first 5 games in the period controlled in the 2nd hold state), the game is controlled in the 2nd hold state, and the number of navigation games is added. It is possible to perform a privilege grant suggestion effect that suggests the possibility.

The sub-control unit 91 receives from the main control unit 41 in each game of the period in which the first hold effect is performed and the period in which the first predetermined number of games elapses in the period in which the second hold effect is performed. When it is specified in the internal lottery that any of the small winning combinations 1 to 6 has been won, a suggestion effect lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform a privilege grant suggestion effect. Then, by winning the suggestion effect lottery, the privilege grant suggestion effect is performed at the start of the game that has won the suggestion effect lottery. In the privilege grant suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), the privilege grant suggestion image (in this embodiment, the character image of "CHANGE") is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, so that the number of navigation games can be added. Suggests the possibility of being done.

In the suggestion effect lottery, when the second hold effect is performed, it is determined that the privilege grant suggestion effect is performed at a higher rate than when the first hold effect is performed. By performing the grant suggestion effect, it means that the second hold effect is performed, that is, the main control unit 41 is controlled to the second hold state, and there is a high possibility that the number of navigation games will be added. It is designed to suggest that.

Next, a flow of control regarding the game by the main control unit 41 and control regarding the effect by the sub control unit 91 related to the first hold effect will be described with reference to FIG. 34.

As shown in FIG. 34, when the control state related to AT is controlled to the AT state and the non-hold state (normal AT state) in which hold control is not performed, the main control unit 41 is a navigation target by an internal lottery. When the combination (in this embodiment, the push order small combination 1 to 6) is won, the navigation notification is performed and the subtraction process for subtracting the remaining number of navigation games is controlled. Then, when the additional state lottery target combination (in this embodiment, the specific small combination 1 and the specific small combination 2) is won in the non-hold state, the additional state lottery is performed, and if the additional state lottery is not won, the additional state lottery is performed. , Control to shift to the first hold state (false precursor state).

On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 performs an AT effect (normal) when the main control unit 41 is controlled to the non-hold state, and it is specified in the internal lottery that the navigation target combination has been won. In the game, control is performed so that the navigation effect is performed according to the navigation notification performed on the main control unit 41 side. Also, at the start of each game for navigating, that is, when the number of navigator games is subtracted on the main control unit 41 side, the number of navigator games in the image suggesting the number of remaining navigator games is updated to be subtracted by one. do.

Then, when the main control unit 41 shifts to the first hold state, the sub control unit 91 controls to perform the first hold effect while continuing the AT effect (normal). In the first hold effect, the hold image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in the effect mode (strong hold effect, weak hold effect) determined by the effect mode lottery performed at the start of the effect, and the AT effect (normally). ), By superimposing the hold image of the first hold effect on the remaining navigation game number suggestion image, control is performed so as to reduce the visibility of the remaining navigation game number suggestion image.

When the main control unit 41 is controlling to the first hold state, the navigation target combination is won by the internal lottery to perform the navigation notification, but the main control unit 41 controls so as not to subtract the remaining number of navigation games.

On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 controls to perform a navigation effect according to the navigation notification performed on the main control unit 41 side in the game in which it is specified that the navigation target combination has been won by the internal lottery. However, the number of remaining navigation games is controlled so as to be maintained without updating by subtracting the number of navigation games in the suggestion image.

Further, the sub-control unit 91 performs a suggestion effect lottery in a game in which it is specified that the navigation target combination has been won by the internal lottery, and by winning the suggestion effect lottery, the privilege grant suggestion effect is performed. It is controlled to the second hold state, and suggests that there is a high possibility that the number of navigation games will be added.

After that, the main control unit 41 ends the control of the first hold state at the end of the game in which the first predetermined number of games (five games in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the control of the first hold state. Then, the game is shifted to the non-hold state that was controlled before the control to the first hold state, and the non-hold state (normal AT state) is controlled from the next game of the game.

On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 is at the end of the game in which the first predetermined number of games (5 games in this embodiment) has elapsed from the time when the control of the first hold effect is started, that is, the main control unit 41. When the control of the first hold state is terminated on the side, the control of the first hold effect is terminated, and the AT effect (normal) performed before the control of the first hold effect is resumed. To control.

Next, a flow of control regarding the game by the main control unit 41 and control regarding the effect by the sub control unit 91 related to the second hold effect will be described with reference to FIG. 35.

As shown in FIG. 35, in the main control unit 41, the control state related to the AT is added in the non-hold state (normal AT state), and the lottery target combination (specific small combination 1 and specific small combination 2 in this embodiment) is won. At that time, the additional state lottery is performed, and when the additional state lottery is won, the control is performed so as to shift to the second hold state (precursor state + additional state).

On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 controls to perform the second hold effect while continuing the AT effect (normal) when the main control unit 41 shifts to the second hold state. In the second hold effect, as in the case of the first hold effect described above, the hold image is displayed on the liquid crystal display in the effect mode (strong hold effect, weak hold effect) determined by the effect mode lottery performed at the start of the effect. By displaying on 51 and displaying the hold image of the second hold effect superimposed on the remaining navigation game number suggestion image displayed by the AT effect (normal), the visibility of the remaining navigation game number suggestion image is lowered. To control.

In the second hold state, the main control unit 41 is in the internal lottery as in the case of controlling to the first hold state (false precursor state) in the period (precursor state) until the first predetermined number of games elapses. When the navigation target role is won and the navigation notification is performed, the number of remaining navigation games is controlled not to be subtracted, and the additional lottery is not performed when the navigation target role is won. .. On the other hand, in the second hold state, in the period from the lapse of the first predetermined number of games to the lapse of the second predetermined number of games (additional state), the control is performed in the first hold state (false precursor state). As in the case, when performing navigation notification, control is performed so that the subtraction process of the number of remaining navigation games is not performed, and an additional lottery that is not performed when controlling to the first hold state (false precursor state) is performed. , It is performed when the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, and the number of navigation games added by winning in the additional lottery is controlled to be added to the remaining number of navigation games.

On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 controls to perform the AT effect (normal) during the period from the start of the control of the second hold effect to the end of the game in which the first predetermined number of games has elapsed. At the same time, in a game in which it is specified that the navigation target role has been won by an internal lottery, it is controlled so that the navigation effect is performed according to the navigation notification performed on the main control unit 41 side, but the remaining navigation game number suggestion image. Controls to maintain without updating by subtracting the number of navigation games in.

Further, in the period from the start of the control of the second hold effect to the end of the game in which the first predetermined number of games has elapsed, in the game in which it is specified by the internal lottery that the navigation target combination has been won, the first game is performed. Similar to the case where the hold effect is performed, the suggestion effect lottery is performed, and by winning the suggestion effect lottery, the privilege grant suggestion effect is performed and the control is performed in the second hold state, and the number of navigation games is added. Suggests that is likely to occur.

Then, at the end of the game in which the first predetermined number of games has elapsed from the start of the control of the second hold effect, the addition state determination effect is performed, and it is suggested that the main control unit 41 side controls the addition state. do. After that, when the next game in which the additional state determination effect is performed, that is, the next game of the game in which the first predetermined number of games elapses from the time when the control of the second hold effect is started, the additional state effect is started. , Suggests that it is controlled to the additional state. Then, when it is specified that the additional lottery has been performed on the main control unit 41 side during the additional state effect, the additional effect is performed and the number of navigation games given in the additional lottery is added. Suggest a number.

Further, the sub control unit 91 responds to the navigation notification performed on the main control unit 41 side in the game in which it is specified by the internal lottery that the navigation target combination has been won while the additional state effect is being performed. It is controlled to perform the navigation effect, but it is controlled to maintain the number of remaining navigation games without updating by subtracting the number of navigation games in the suggestion image. Then, when the additional state effect is terminated, the remaining navigation game number suggestion image is updated so that the total number of navigation games given by the additional lottery during the period during which the additional state effect is being performed is added to the number of navigation games. Control to do.

After that, the main control unit 41 ends the control of the second hold state at the end of the game in which the second predetermined number of games (15 games in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the control of the second hold state. Then, the game is shifted to the non-hold state that was controlled before the control to the second hold state, and the non-hold state (normal AT state) is controlled from the next game of the game.

On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 is at the end of the game in which the second predetermined number of games (15 games in this embodiment) has elapsed from the time when the control of the second hold effect is started, that is, the main control unit 41. When the control of the second hold state is terminated on the side, the control of the second hold effect is terminated, and the AT effect (normal) performed before the control of the second hold effect is resumed. To control.

In this way, the sub-control unit 91 can display the remaining number of navigation games suggestion image displaying the remaining number of navigation games in the AT state on the liquid crystal display 51.

Further, the sub control unit 91 reduces the remaining number of displayed navigation games when the remaining number of navigation games decreases due to the subtraction processing of the number of navigation games on the main control unit 41 side. It is possible to update the remaining navigation game number suggestion image so as to let.

Further, the sub control unit 91 can perform a hold effect suggesting that the main control unit 41 is controlled to the hold state, and the hold effect is controlled to the hold state in the first hold state. It includes a first hold effect suggesting that effect and a second hold effect suggesting that the hold state is controlled in the second hold state.

Further, the sub-control unit 91 retains the hold image both when it suggests that the hold state is controlled by the first hold effect and when it suggests that the hold state is controlled by the second hold effect. By superimposing the image suggesting the number of navigation games on the player side, it is controlled so as to reduce the visibility of the remaining number of navigation games displayed by the suggestion image of the number of remaining navigation games.

Further, the sub control unit 91 can perform the first hold effect for a period controlled by the main control unit 41 side in the first hold state, and the hold image remains in the number of navigation games during the first hold effect. By controlling the display so as to be superimposed on the suggestion image, the visibility of the remaining number of navigation games displayed by the suggestion image is lowered during the period controlled by the first hold state.

Further, the sub control unit 91 can perform the second hold effect for a period controlled by the main control unit 41 side in the second hold state, and the hold image remains in the number of navigation games during the second hold effect. By controlling the display so as to be superimposed on the suggestion image, the visibility of the remaining number of navigation games displayed by the suggestion image is lowered during the period controlled by the second hold state.

Further, the sub-control unit 91 is in an effect state in which the sub-control unit 91 is controlled before the first hold effect and the second hold effect are controlled, even after the first hold effect is ended and the second hold effect is ended. It is controlled so that the AT state (normal) in which the production contents are common is performed.

Further, the sub control unit 91 controls to perform the AT state (normal) after the end of the first hold effect and after the end of the second hold effect, so that the first hold state is set on the main control unit 41 side. The background image A of the common AT effect (normal) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 both after the end and after the end of the second hold state.

Further, the sub control unit 91 performs the first hold effect when the main control unit 41 is controlled to the first hold state, and performs the second hold effect when the main control unit 41 is controlled to the second hold state. It is possible that the second hold state is controlled both when the first hold effect is being performed and when the second hold effect is being performed, and there is a possibility that the number of navigation games will be added. It is possible to perform a privilege grant suggestion effect that suggests.

Further, the sub control unit 91 is controlled to the first hold state on the main control unit 41 side, and even when the first hold effect is being performed, it is possible to perform the privilege grant suggestion effect, and the first Even in the hold state, it is controlled to the second hold state as a privilege by the privilege grant suggestion effect, which suggests that the number of navigation games may be added.

[Action 1]
As a conventional slot machine, there is one that is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and has a configuration that includes an advantageous state lamp that is lit for a period that is controlled to the advantageous state. In the slot machine having such a configuration, the timing at which the advantageous state lamp is turned on and the timing at which the advantageous state lamp is turned off are not considered.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is determined that the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes the target of the advantageous section transition lottery, and the main control unit 41 shifts to the advantageous section in the advantageous section transition lottery. In this case, it is possible to shift the game section from the normal section to the advantageous section advantageous to the player, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a (right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) notifies that the transition has been made to the advantageous section. 8th segment) is provided, and after shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started to light at the start of the game in which the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied by first performing the navigation notification, which is advantageous. It is possible to notify that the section has been transferred, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started to light before the navigation notification is first performed in the advantageous section. In such a configuration, it is possible to start lighting the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the time the navigation notification is performed in the advantageous section to notify that the advantageous section is controlled.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to start lighting the advantageous section notification LED 12a and then start the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12, but the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on and the game auxiliary display is displayed. The display of the navigation notification in the device 12 may be started at the same time. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to start lighting the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the time the navigation notification is performed in the advantageous section to notify that the advantageous section is controlled.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section, the advantageous section can be terminated by satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section, and the advantageous section can be terminated. It is provided with an advantageous section notification LED 12a (8th segment of the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) for notifying the end of the above, and when it is an advantageous section, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be in a lighting state. When the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a specific result (small winning combination), the main control unit 41 can stop different symbol combinations on the reel according to the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. At this time, since the timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended differs depending on the stopped symbol combination, it is possible to pay attention to the notification by the advantageous section notification LED 12a.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a predetermined result (re-game combination), the main control unit 41 has a different symbol combination according to the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. Is possible to be stopped on the reel, and at this time, since the timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended is common depending on the stopped symbol combination, the suggestion by the advantageous section notification LED 12a This can prevent the player from being confused.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment stores the number of medals owned by the player as credits, and can settle the number of medals stored as credits when the settlement operation is performed by the settlement switch 10. When the advantageous section is terminated, the main control unit 41 notifies that the advantageous section has ended by the advantageous section notification LED 12a during the period from when the reel is stopped to when the acceptance of the settlement operation becomes effective. Since it is configured, the player can end the game after recognizing that the advantageous section has ended.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the small winning combination wins and the advantageous section ends, the main control unit 41 takes advantage of the timing after the display of the number of medals to be paid out by the game auxiliary display 12 is completed. Since the notification LED 12a is configured to notify that the advantageous section has ended, it is possible to notify that the advantageous section has ended after recognizing that the medal has been paid out.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the re-game combination wins and the advantageous section ends, it is advantageous at the timing after the notification that the re-game has been granted is completed by starting the lighting of the LED 20 during the replay. Since the section notification LED 12a is configured to notify that the advantageous section has ended, it is possible to indicate that the advantageous section has ended after recognizing that the replay has been granted.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the advantageous section is ended, the medals are inserted by starting the lighting of the insertion request LED 17 after all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have stopped rotating. Since the configuration is such that the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended at the timing before the notification that the advantageous section is completed, the player starts the next game without knowing that the advantageous section has ended. It is possible to prevent the medal from being thrown in for the purpose.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment displays the number of medals to be paid out to the player in connection with the navigation notification for notifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R which is advantageous for the player and the winning of the small winning combination. During the period in which the game auxiliary display 12 is provided and controlled to the advantageous section, it is possible to control the eighth segment of the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 as the advantageous section notification LED 12a, which is advantageous. It is a configuration that can notify that the section has shifted, and that a part of the game auxiliary display 12 is used as the advantageous section notification LED 12a to notify that the section has shifted to the advantageous section and that the advantageous section has ended. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the main control unit 41 with a display means separate from the game auxiliary display 12 for displaying the navigation notification and the number of medals to be paid out as the display means for notifying the shift to the advantageous section.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 uses a part of the game assist indicator 12 as the advantageous section notification LED 12a to notify that the advantageous section has been transferred and that the advantageous section has ended. A display means provided separately from the display 12 may be used as the advantageous section notification LED 12a to notify that the transition to the advantageous section has occurred. For example, the game auxiliary display 12 may be located in the vicinity of the game auxiliary display 12. May be configured to arrange a separate display means such as an LED or a lamp and use the display means to notify that the advantageous section has been entered and that the advantageous section has ended. According to this configuration, separately from the game auxiliary display 12, a display means for notifying that the advantageous section has been entered and that the advantageous section has ended is provided, so that a display for notifying that the advantageous section has been entered is displayed. It can be clearly distinguished from other displays and recognized, and even in this case, since it is provided in the vicinity of the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking it.

In addition, various display means for notifying that the advantageous section has shifted and the advantageous section has ended are, for example, a credit display 11 provided in the game display unit 13, a game auxiliary display 12, an input request LED 17, and the like. By arranging the display on the substrate on which the display or the like is arranged, the display means can be provided in the vicinity of the game auxiliary display 12, and the player can prevent oversight. Further, by arranging display means for notifying the shift to the advantageous section, for example, around switches operated at the start or end of the game such as MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, and settlement switch 10. , It is possible to prevent oversight by the player.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 shifts the game section to the advantageous section and then satisfies the advantageous section notification start condition, so that the advantageous section notification starts at the start of the game in which the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied. The LED 12a is turned on to notify that the advantageous section has been entered, while the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off at the end of the game in which the advantageous section is ended to notify that the advantageous section has ended. However, the main control unit 41 turns on the advantageous section notification LED 12a at the end of the game of shifting to the advantageous section, notifies that the transition to the advantageous section has occurred, and at the end of the game in which the advantageous section ends, The advantageous section notification LED 12a may be turned off to notify that the advantageous section is completed.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment includes an advantageous section notification LED 12a (eighth segment of the right display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) for notifying that the advantageous section has shifted and the advantageous section has ended. By controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the off state, it is possible to notify that the advantageous section has ended. In the main processing, the state control data (off) is sent to the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. Before performing the setting process, in the AT state management process, the process of initializing the predetermined area in which the data related to the advantageous section is stored in the RAM 41c is performed to initialize the data related to the advantageous section, which is advantageous. It is possible to prevent data relating to the advantageous section from remaining in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c even though the section notification LED 12a is controlled to be turned off to notify that the advantageous section has ended.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 initializes the data related to the advantageous section stored in the RAM 41c before performing the process of setting the state control data (off) in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. This process initializes the data related to the advantageous section before controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the off state. However, at the same time as the control to turn off the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the advantageous section is turned off. It may be configured to initialize the data related to. For example, the process of setting the state control data (off) in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a and the process of initializing the data related to the advantageous section are performed in the timer interrupt process performed at the same timing. The control for turning off the advantageous section notification LED 12a and the process for initializing the data related to the advantageous section can be performed at the same time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to initialize the data relating to the advantageous section before controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the extinguished state, but it is advantageous after initializing the data relating to the advantageous section. The section notification LED 12a may be controlled to be turned off. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the data related to the advantageous section from being initialized during the period in which the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be in the lighting state.

In the main process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment stores data related to the advantageous section in the AT state management process before performing the process of setting the state control data (off) in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. The configuration is such that the initialization process for initializing the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed, and the predetermined area of the RAM 41c initialized by the initialization process does not include the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, and the initialization process is performed. Since the data relating to the advantageous section initialized by is not included in the state control data (lighting) set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is used for state control. Before performing the process of setting the data (turning off), the state control data (lighting) set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a may be initialized by the initialization process in the AT state management process. Therefore, it is possible to reliably control the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state until the advantageous section ends.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section (from the total number of medals paid out in the advantageous section to the total number of medals used to set the number of bets in the advantageous section. It is possible to update the net increase number counter for counting the number of sheets obtained by subtracting the number of sheets), and the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section specified based on the value of the net increase number counter is predetermined. Number of sheets (in this embodiment, a value (2388) obtained by subtracting the maximum value (15) of the number of payouts in the slot machine 1 from 2400 sheets and adding the maximum number of sheets (3 sheets) used for setting the number of bets). When the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, that is, when the specified number of medals in the advantageous section reaches the specified number + 1 or more, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed to end the advantageous section and shift to the normal section. When updating the net increase number counter, the main control unit 41 adds the value for the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase number counter, and the value for the medals used for setting the bet number. If the calculated value obtained by subtracting is less than 0, the value of the net increase number counter is corrected to 0, and if the calculated value is 0 or more, the calculated value is used as the value of the net increase counter. By controlling to update the value of the net increase counter, the net increase of medals is counted starting from the time when the net increase of medals is the smallest after the start of the advantageous section. Based on the value of the number counter, when the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section is terminated and the normal section is transferred.

According to this configuration, after the start of the advantageous section, when the net increase of medals up to the present starting from the time when the net increase of the game value is the smallest exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section is terminated and the normal section is terminated. Even if the net increase in medals starting from the start of the advantageous section does not exceed the specified number, it is advantageous if the net increase in medals after the number of medals starts to increase exceeds the specified number. Since the section ends, not only the net increase of medals in the advantageous section but also the net increase of medals after the start of the advantageous section can be limited to the range based on the specified number of medals.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 specifies the payout number value of medals to be paid out based on the winning flag of the game during the advantageous section when updating the net increase number counter in the AT state management process. , Based on the net increase value obtained by adding the payout number to the net increase value specified based on the net increase counter and subtracting the number of medals used for the bet number from the added net increase value. The configuration for updating the net increase number counter, that is, the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section counted by the net increase number counter is the configuration which is counted based on the number of medals actually paid out as a result of the game in the advantageous section. , The net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section may be at least the number of medals given to the player minus the medals used in the game by setting the number of bets by the player. It is possible to win a prize when the winning of a predetermined small winning combination accompanied by the awarding of a medal is actually allowed, and even though the player can generate the winning of the small winning combination. If not, the medals given by assuming that the small winning combination has been won may be counted as the medals given to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control unit 41 updates the net increase number counter in the AT state management process, the net increase number value specified based on the net increase number counter is read into a predetermined register, and then the game is played. Specify the payout number value of the medals to be paid out based on the winning flag, add the payout number to the net increase number value of the predetermined register, and subtract the number of medals used for setting the bet number from the net increase number value after addition. The configuration is such that the net increase number counter is updated based on the net increase number value obtained by doing so, but the main control unit 41 is concerned from the payout number value of the medals paid out in the game when updating the net increase number counter. The net increase counter may be updated by adding the net increase obtained by subtracting the number of medals used for setting the bet number in the game to the net increase counter.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number in the AT state management process, and the main control unit 41 is specified based on the net increase counter. After reading the numerical value into the predetermined register, specify the payout number value of the medal to be paid out based on the winning flag of the game, add the payout number to the net increase number value of the predetermined register, and bet from the net increase number value after addition. By subtracting the number of medals used to set the number, the net increase value in the game is calculated in the predetermined register, and it is determined whether or not the net increase value of the predetermined register exceeds the specified number. However, the main control unit 41 calculates the net increase number of the game based on the number of medals paid out and the number of medals used for setting the bet number in the game, and the calculated net increase number is the net increase number counter. After updating the net increase number counter, it may be determined whether or not the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number based on the value of the net increase number counter.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control unit 41 updates the net increase number counter in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 adds the value corresponding to the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase number counter, and the number of bets. If the calculated value obtained by subtracting the value of the medals used in the setting of is smaller than 0, the value of the net increase number counter is corrected to 0. In the net increase number counter, the number of medals is increased or decreased. When is less than 0, the numerical value less than 0 is not counted, and only the numerical value exceeding 0 is counted. However, the main control unit 41 is configured to count the numerical value less than 0, that is, for games in the minus region. It may be configured to count the net increase in value. For example, the main control unit 41 initializes the net increase number counter to 0 at the start of the advantageous section, and then, when the medals are paid out in the advantageous section, the value corresponding to the number of medals paid out is set to the net increase number counter. By repeating the process of subtracting the value for the number of medals from the net increase counter when the medals are used to set the number of bets, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section can be counted. , When the number of medals increased or decreased is less than 0 or more than 0, it can be counted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals based on the value of the net increase counter after the start of the advantageous section, starting from the time when the net increase in medals is the smallest. However, when the main control unit 41 shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, the net increase in the number of medals up to the present starting from the normal section exceeds the specified number. It may be configured to end the advantageous section and shift to the normal section. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase of medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and the normal section is set. Control to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the net increase number counter because it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase number of medals starting from the time when the transition from to the advantageous section is performed. Can be simplified.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals based on the value of the net increase counter after the start of the advantageous section, starting from the time when the net increase in medals is the smallest. However, it is suggested that the main control unit 41 has shifted to the AT state by the advantageous section notification LED 12a after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section as an opportunity set uniformly after the start of the advantageous section, and also the navigation notification. When the operation mode for increasing the number of medals is notified, if the net increase in the number of medals up to the present starting from the above exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section may be terminated and the normal section may be used. According to this, the starting point for counting the net increase of medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section notification LED 12a indicates that the transition to the advantageous section is performed. Is suggested, and since it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase number of medals starting from the time other than when the operation mode for increasing the number of medals is notified by the navigation notification, the value of the net increase number counter. It is possible to simplify the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals based on the value of the net increase counter after the start of the advantageous section, starting from the time when the net increase in medals is the smallest. However, the main control unit 41 is set uniformly after the start of the advantageous section, regardless of whether or not the operation mode for increasing medals is notified by the navigation notification after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section. , When the advantageous section notification LED 12a suggests that the AT state has been entered, if the net increase in the number of medals up to the present starting from the specified number exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section is terminated and the normal section is shifted. Well, according to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase in medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, the medals are increased by the navigation notification. Regardless of whether or not the operation mode to be notified is notified, it is necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase number of medals starting from the time other than when the advantageous section notification LED 12a indicates that the advantageous section has been started. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the net increase number counter.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 has an AT state in which navigation notification is performed to notify the player of an operation mode advantageous to the player when the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery during the advantageous section, and the inside. It is possible to control the control state related to AT including the precursor state in which the navigation notification is not performed even if the navigation target combination is won by lottery, and when updating the net increase number counter in the AT state management process, Regardless of whether the control state related to AT is the AT state or not, when a prize is generated with the payout of medals, the number of medals to be paid out is added to the net increase number counter, and the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section is obtained. However, when updating the net increase number counter, the main control unit 41 is targeted for navigation by an internal lottery when the control state related to AT is a control state other than the AT state during the advantageous section. When the winning combination is won and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player and the number of medals increases, the increased amount is added to the net increase number counter, and the navigation target role is won by the internal lottery. When the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are not operated and the number of medals does not increase in an operation mode advantageous to the player, the net increase number counter is not added and the control state regarding AT is the AT state during the advantageous section. When the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, the operation mode is advantageous for the player regardless of whether or not the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated and the medals are increased. The increase in medals when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated may be added to the net increase number counter to count the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section. In a precursory state where an operation mode advantageous to the player is not notified, even if the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, if the number of medals actually increases, it can be added to the net increase number counter to increase the number of medals. If not, the medals are not added to the net increase counter, and in the AT state where the operation mode advantageous to the player is notified in the advantageous section, the medals actually increase when the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery. The net increase counter is added regardless of whether or not the medals are actually increased, and if the player can increase the number of medals, the net increase counter is added regardless of whether or not the medals are actually increased. By adding, the advantageous section is intentionally extended. If the player cannot surely increase the number of medals while preventing the above, adding the net increase number counter only when the number of medals actually increases will be disadvantageous to the player. Can be prevented.

In addition, when updating the net increase number counter, if the control state related to AT is a control state other than the AT state during the advantageous section, the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, and the number increases when the number of medals increases. When the minutes are added to the net increase number counter and the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, but the medals do not increase, the net increase number counter is not added and the control state related to AT is the AT state during the advantageous section. In addition, when the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, the increase in medals when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player regardless of whether or not the medals have increased. Is added to the net increase number counter to count the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section, and the main control unit 41 is in the advantageous section regardless of which control state the control state regarding AT is. When the lottery result of the internal lottery is a predetermined small winning combination in which the predetermined operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing medals does not change, it is operated in the predetermined operation mode and whether or not the number of medals is increased. Instead, the increase in medals when operated in a predetermined operation mode may be added to the net increase number counter to count the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section. According to this configuration, the game may be played in the advantageous section. If a person can increase the number of medals, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from being intentionally extended by adding the net increase number counter regardless of whether or not the number of medals is actually increased.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has at least one of the conditions that the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games and the net increase number in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined predetermined number. Is configured to end the advantageous section when is established, and in the AT state management process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games specified based on the advantageous section game number counter has reached the upper limit number of games. , When it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed without determining whether or not the net increase number in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, and the advantageous section is determined. Since it is configured to end, if it is established that the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit game number as the end condition of the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the net increase number in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. Since it is not necessary to perform this, it is possible to simplify the control for determining whether or not the net increase in the number of sheets in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number of sheets.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has at least one of the conditions that the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games and the net increase number in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined predetermined number. Is configured to end the advantageous section when the above is established. In the AT state management process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the maximum number of games, and the number of advantageous section games has reached the maximum number of games. If this is not the case, it is determined whether or not the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. Therefore, in the AT state management process, first, whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit is determined. Since the determination is made, when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games and the advantageous section is terminated, the advantageous section is more complicated than the control related to the determination of whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games. It is possible to omit the control related to the determination of whether or not the net increase number exceeds the specified number.

In this embodiment, in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 first determines whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, and the number of advantageous section games has not reached the upper limit number of games. In this case, it is configured to determine whether or not the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. However, in the AT state management process, first, it is determined whether or not the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, which is advantageous. When the net increase number in the section does not exceed the specified number, it may be configured to determine whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games. According to this configuration, the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games. Since the frequency in which the net increase in the number of sheets in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number may be higher than the frequency in which the number is increased, the control related to the determination of the infrequent event can be omitted.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has at least one of the conditions that the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games and the net increase number in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined predetermined number. Is configured to end the advantageous section when is established, and when both the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games and the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section game is established. Performs the same advantageous section data initialization processing as when the number reaches the upper limit number of games or when the net increase number in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, and common data (data related to the advantageous section) is obtained. Since it is configured to be initialized, the number of advantageous section games in the advantageous section is established when both the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section and the net increase number in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. Initializes the same data as when one of the cases where the maximum number of games is reached or the net increase number in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number is satisfied, so when both conditions are satisfied and only one condition is satisfied. It is possible to prevent a difference in advantage from the case where is established.

For example, if it is only established that the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section as the first condition and the advantageous section ends, the data corresponding to the first condition is initialized and the second condition is as follows. When the net increase in the advantageous section only exceeds the specified number and the advantageous section ends, both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in the configuration for initializing the data corresponding to the second condition. If the data corresponding to the first condition and the data corresponding to the second condition are initialized when the advantageous section ends, the game is more than when either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. Although it may be disadvantageous to the person, when both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in the advantageous section, the same data as when either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in the advantageous section is used. By configuring the initialization, it is possible to prevent a difference in advantage between the case where both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied and the case where either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. can.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games in the AT state management process, and the net increase number in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined predetermined number. Since the advantageous section is terminated when at least one of the conditions is satisfied, the advantageous section ends when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, so that the advantageous section continues for a long period of time. Even if the advantageous section does not continue for a long period of time, if the number of medals increases sharply in the advantageous section, the net increase in the advantageous section will exceed the specified number and the advantageous section will end. It is possible to prevent the advantage in the advantageous section from becoming excessively high.

In the ball ejection control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the control state data (lighting) in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a when the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied, and waits for one interrupt. After that, by controlling the navigation display of the navigation notification to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 by the instruction setting process, after starting the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the game auxiliary display 12 is used. In a game in which navigation notification is started and it is suggested that the advantageous section notification LED 12a has shifted to an advantageous section, when the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing medals is notified by navigation notification. , The configuration suggests that the advantageous section notification LED12a has shifted to the advantageous section at a timing before the timing at which the operation modes of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that increase the number of medals by the navigation notification are notified. In a game in which it is suggested that the notification LED 12a has shifted to an advantageous section, when the operation mode of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing medals is notified by the navigation notification, the stop switch for increasing the medals by the navigation notification. Since it is suggested that the advantageous section notification LED12a has shifted to the advantageous section before the operation modes of 8L, 8C, and 8R are notified, the medal in the game after recognizing that the transition to the advantageous section has occurred. It is possible to recognize the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 has shifted to the advantageous section by the advantageous section notification LED 12a at a timing before the timing when the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that increase the medals by the navigation notification is notified. Although it is a suggested configuration, in a game in which the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied, the advantageous section notification LED12a is at the same timing as the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing the number of medals by the navigation notification is notified. It may be a configuration that suggests that the lighting of the above has started and the transition to the advantageous section has occurred. When the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is notified, the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing the number of medals is notified by the navigation notification. Since it is suggested that the section has shifted, it is possible to simultaneously recognize the shift to the advantageous section and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that increase the number of medals.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 has shifted to the advantageous section by the advantageous section notification LED 12a at a timing before the timing when the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that increase the medals by the navigation notification is notified. Although it is a suggested configuration, in a game in which it is suggested that the advantageous section notification LED 12a has shifted to the advantageous section, when the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing the number of medals is notified by the navigation notification. A configuration may be used in which the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing the number of medals is notified by the navigation, and then the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started to suggest that the transition to the advantageous section is performed. , In a game in which it is suggested that the advantageous section notification LED 12a has shifted to the advantageous section, when the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing the medals is notified by the navigation notification, the medals are increased by the navigation notification. Since it is suggested that the advantageous section notification LED12a has shifted to the advantageous section after the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is notified, the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing the medals is notified. After that, it is possible to pay attention to the timing at which it is suggested that the section has shifted to the advantageous section.

[Action effect 2]
As a conventional slot machine, it is designed so that the payout rate of medals is appropriate when the operation mode that is advantageous for the player is controlled to the advantageous section that can be notified, or when the winning of the special prize is carried over. There is one with a configured configuration.

In the latter slot machine, where the winning of the special prize is carried over, in the configuration designed so that the medal payout rate is appropriate, the slot machine is first installed in the amusement store or the data. When is initialized, it is necessary for the game store to play games until a special prize is won so that the payout rate of medals is appropriate. On the other hand, in the former slot machine that is controlled to an advantageous section, if the configuration is such that the game can be controlled to the advantageous section in the situation where the game store plays the game until the special prize is won, before the player plays the game. Since there is a possibility that it is controlled in an advantageous section, there is a risk that fairness will be impaired when the player plays a game.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the special combination (BB) is won by the internal lottery and the symbol combination of the special combination (BB) is not derived, the special combination (BB) It is possible to carry over the winning of the game to the next game or later, and when the push order small winning combination is won in the internal lottery, the operation mode (correct answer push order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that is advantageous for the player It is possible to perform navigation notification to notify, and it is possible to control to an advantageous section where it is possible to notify the correct answer push order by navigation notification, and the winning of the special role (BB) is carried over. It is possible to notify the operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, which is more advantageous by navigation notification inside the inside, and it is designed so that the payout rate of medals is appropriate inside the inside. It is possible to control the advantageous section in both non-internal and internal areas where the winning of the special role (BB) is not carried over, and the end conditions of the advantageous section in the internal are at least end condition 1 and end condition. While any of 2 is satisfied, the end condition of the advantageous section in the non-internal is that the end condition 3 is satisfied, and the end condition of the advantageous section in the internal and the advantageous section in the non-internal are satisfied. The configuration is different from the end condition.

According to this configuration, in a configuration in which the medal payout rate is appropriate inside, while the medal payout rate is not appropriate inside the inside, the end condition of the advantageous section inside the inside and the end condition in the non-inside. Since the end condition of the advantageous section is different, suitable control can be performed depending on whether it is inside or not inside.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can be controlled to an advantageous section in which the correct answer pressing order can be notified by navigation notification, and the payout rate of medals is appropriate inside, while non-internal. In the configuration, the payout rate of medals is improper, and it is possible to control the advantageous section in both non-internal and internal, and whether or not the gaming state is non-internal in each game in the advantageous section. If it is determined that the game is non-internal, the advantageous section is controlled to end at the end of the game, and the advantageous section starts when the advantageous section is controlled in the non-internal. It is a configuration that ends the advantageous section in the game that has been played.

According to this configuration, in a configuration in which the medal payout rate is appropriate inside, while the medal payout rate is not appropriate inside the non-internal, the medal payout rate is controlled to an advantageous section in the non-internal. Since the advantageous section is terminated in the game in which the advantageous section is started, the player can play the game even if the game is controlled by the game store side until the medal payout rate becomes appropriate. Since the advantageous section ends before the game is played, it is possible to prevent the player from losing fairness when playing the game.

In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game state is non-internal in each game in the advantageous section, and if it is determined that the game state is non-internal, the advantageous section ends at the end of the game. By controlling so as to make the advantageous section end in the game in which the advantageous section starts when the advantageous section is controlled in the non-internal environment, the advantageous section ends in the game in which the advantageous section starts. Any configuration may be used, for example, only in the first game of the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the game state is non-internal, and if it is determined that the game state is non-internal, it is advantageous at the end of the game. It may be configured to control so as to end the section.

In the present embodiment, the slot machine 1 is controlled in the game during the advantageous section by applying that the gaming state is non-internal as an arbitrary condition (end condition 3) among the end conditions of the advantageous section. By controlling to end the advantageous section when it is established that the gaming state is in the non-internal, when the advantageous section is controlled in the non-internal, the game in which the advantageous section is started is concerned. Although it is configured to end the advantageous section, as an optional condition, it may be applied that the controlled gaming state is in the internal state, and when the advantageous section is controlled in the non-internal state, the game state is in the internal state. It is also possible to terminate the advantageous section on the assumption that an arbitrary condition is satisfied. For example, when controlling to an advantageous section, a game in which it is specified that the game state changes from non-internal to internal (non-internal and internal) by referring to the game state of the game and the winning status of the special role. In a game in which the winning of a special role is specified), by controlling so as to end the advantageous section, when the advantageous section is controlled in the non-internal, an arbitrary condition is satisfied when the advantageous section is in the internal. It can be configured to end the advantageous section. Further, the advantageous section may be terminated on the assumption that the arbitrary condition is satisfied when the inside is inside. For example, when controlling to an advantageous section, a game in which it is specified that the game state has changed from non-internal to internal (the previous game is non-internal) by referring to the game state of the game and the game state of the previous game. In the game (the game in which the game is inside in the inside), the control is made so that the advantageous section ends, so that when the advantage section is controlled in the non-inside, it is an arbitrary condition when it becomes inside. Can be configured to end the advantageous section on the assumption that is established.

According to this configuration, in a configuration in which the medal payout rate is appropriate inside the inside, while the medal payout rate is not appropriate inside the non-internal, when the medal payout rate is controlled to an advantageous section in the non-internal, the inside Since the advantageous section is terminated by being in the middle, even if the game is controlled by the game store side until the medal payout rate is inside the inside, even if the player is controlled to the advantageous section, before the player plays the game. This means that the advantageous section ends, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing fairness when playing the game.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment can be controlled as a non-internal, internal, or special state as a gaming state, and the special state is a combination of a BB general and a special combination (RB) symbol in the BB general. Including RB that shifts by deriving, in general BB, the probability that the special combination (RB) that is allowed to derive the symbol combination of the special combination (RB) is won in the internal lottery is normal (non-). It is in a higher state than inside and inside), and in RB, the probability that a small winning combination that is allowed to derive a symbol combination of a small winning combination with a medal will be won in the internal lottery is higher than inside and inside. Is also in a high state, and in general, the BB is not controlled to an advantageous section.

According to this configuration, since the medal payout rate is not controlled to the advantageous section in the general BB, it is not necessary to perform unnecessary control regarding the advantageous section in the general BB.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment can be controlled as a non-internal, internal, or special state as a gaming state, and the special state is a combination of a BB general and a special combination (RB) symbol in the BB general. Including RB that shifts by deriving, in general BB, the probability that the special combination (RB) that is allowed to derive the symbol combination of the special combination (RB) is won in the internal lottery is normal (non-). It is in a higher state than inside and inside), and in RB, the probability that a small winning combination that is allowed to derive a symbol combination of a small winning combination with a medal will be won in the internal lottery is higher than inside and inside. Is also in a high state, and in RB, it is not controlled to an advantageous section.

According to this configuration, in the RB where the payout rate of medals is not appropriate, the advantageous section is not controlled, so that unnecessary control regarding the advantageous section in the RB does not need to be performed.

In this embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to a state other than BB in general (non-internal medium, internal medium, RB), the special combination (RB) is not subject to the internal lottery, while the gaming state is BB. When it is general, by being subject to the internal lottery, the probability that the special combination (RB), which is allowed to derive the symbol combination of the special combination (RB), will be won in the internal lottery is normal (non-). It is a configuration that is higher than the internal and internal), but even when the gaming state is controlled to be non-internal or internal, the special role (RB) is the target of the internal lottery. , The probability that the special role (RB) will be won in the internal lottery in the general BB is compared with the probability that the special role (RB) will be won in the internal lottery in at least one of the non-internal and internal states. A high configuration is also acceptable.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a sub control unit 91 that can execute an internal suggestion that suggests that it is inside, and a main that can execute advantageous section notification that suggests that it is controlled in an advantageous section. A control unit 41 and a sub control unit 91 suggest that the game state has been transferred to the inside by ending the preparatory effect at the end of the game in which the game state has been transferred from the non-internal to the internal. While the internal suggestion can be executed using the liquid crystal display 51, the main control unit 41 uses the advantageous section notification LED 12a at the start of the next game of the game in which the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section. It is possible to perform advantageous section notification, and the position where the internal suggestion is executed and the position where the advantageous section notification is executed are different, and the timing at which the internal suggestion is executed and the advantageous section notification are executed. The configuration is different from the timing.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestion that the inside is inside and the suggestion that the inside is shifted to the advantageous section by the advantageous section notification from being misunderstood.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can be controlled to an advantageous section in which the correct answer pressing order can be notified by navigation notification, and the payout rate of medals is appropriate inside, while it is not inside. In the configuration, the payout rate of medals is improper, and a main control unit 41 capable of executing advantageous section notification suggesting that the medal is controlled in an advantageous section is provided, and both inside and outside the inside are provided. It is possible to control in an advantageous section, and the main control unit 41 can shift to the AT state (low accuracy / high accuracy) for performing navigation notification while controlling internally and in an advantageous section, which is advantageous. After shifting to the section, by controlling to perform the advantageous section notification in the game that first performs the navigation notification, it is possible to execute the advantageous section notification when it is controlled to the advantageous section in the inside, but it is not. The configuration is such that the advantageous section notification is not executed when the advantageous section is controlled in the interior.

According to this configuration, the medal payout rate is appropriate inside, while the medal payout rate is not appropriate inside the non-internal, and the medal payout rate is appropriate in the internal advantageous section. When controlled, the advantageous section notification can be executed, but when the medal payout rate is controlled to the advantageous section in the non-internal, the advantageous section notification is not executed, so that the medal payout rate It is not necessary to perform unnecessary advantageous section notification in the situation where the game is played on the game store side until the inside of the inside becomes appropriate.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can be controlled to an advantageous section in which the correct answer pressing order can be notified by navigation notification, and the payout rate of medals is appropriate inside, while it is not inside. In the configuration, the payout rate of medals is improper, and the main control unit 41 capable of executing the advantageous section notification suggesting that it is controlled in the advantageous section, and the internal inside suggesting that it is inside. When the sub-control unit 91 capable of executing the suggestion is provided and the configuration can be controlled in an advantageous section both in the non-internal and in the internal, and the main control unit 41 controls in the internal and in the advantageous section. In addition, it is possible to shift to the AT state (low accuracy / high accuracy) that performs navigation notification, and after shifting to the advantageous section, control to perform advantageous section notification in the game that first performs navigation notification. Therefore, when the advantageous section is controlled in the non-internal, the sub-control unit 91 does not execute the advantageous section notification, but the sub-control unit 91 performs the preparatory effect when the control is performed in the non-internal, from the non-internal to the internal. By ending when it is moved to the inside, and controlling it so that the normal effect performed inside the inside is performed instead of performing the effect during preparation when it is controlled inside the inside, from the non-inside to the inside. It is a configuration that executes internal suggestions when migrated.

According to this configuration, in the configuration where the medal payout rate is appropriate inside, while the medal payout rate is not appropriate inside the non-internal, it is an advantageous section in the inside where the medal payout rate is appropriate. When controlled, the advantageous section notification can be executed, but when the medal payout rate is controlled to the advantageous section in the non-internal, the advantageous section notification is not executed by the main control unit 41. , Unnecessary suggestions are not executed in the situation where the game shop side plays the game until the medal payout rate becomes appropriate inside, but when shifting from non-internal to internal, the sub control unit Since the internal suggestion by 91 is executed, it can be specified that the medal payout rate is appropriate in the situation where the game is played on the game store side.

In this embodiment, the sub control unit 91 displays the preparation screen and the non-internal middle suggestion screen on the liquid crystal display 51 in the preparation stage, so that the game state is non-internal on the main control unit 41 side. It is controlled to be in a medium or special state, and it is a configuration that suggests that the medal payout rate has not been transferred to the inside where it is appropriate, but the preparatory production is at least on the main control unit 41 side to pay out medals. The sub-control unit 91 may be configured to display only the preparing screen on the liquid crystal display 51 in the preparing effect, as long as it suggests that the rate has not been transferred to the inside where the rate is appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 performs the preparatory effect when the game state is controlled inside non-internal, while the preparatory effect when the game state is controlled inside. By not doing this, it is configured to make an internal suggestion that suggests that the gaming state has shifted from non-internal to internal, but the internal suggestion is at least the internal suggestion that the payout rate of medals is appropriate. It suffices as long as it can suggest that the gaming state has shifted from non-internal to internal in the situation where the game is played on the game store side, and the period during which the main control unit 41 is controlled inside. (For example, an effect of displaying a specific image on the liquid crystal display 51, an effect of controlling a specific LED in a lighting state, an effect of outputting a specific sound from the speakers 53, 54, etc.) in The specific effect may not be performed during the period controlled inside, or the specific effect may be performed during the period controlled inside the non-inside, while the specific effect is performed during the period controlled inside the inside. It may be configured not to be performed. Further, in these configurations, the specific effect may be performed in one game or may be performed over a plurality of games. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the gaming state has shifted from non-internal to internal in a situation where the game is played on the game store side until the medal payout rate becomes appropriate. be.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 performs a non-internal middle display effect that is not performed when the game state is controlled inside, each time the game state is controlled inside the non-inside. Every time the game state changes from non-internal to internal, it is configured to make an internal suggestion that suggests that the game has shifted from non-internal to internal, but the internal suggestion is that at least the medal payout rate is appropriate. In the situation where the game is played on the game shop side until it becomes inside, it is sufficient if it can suggest that the game state has shifted from the non-inside to the inside, and the RAM is cleared on the main control unit 41 side. After it is specified that the gaming state has not yet been transferred to the inside, the storage means of the sub control unit 91 (for example, in the controlled non-inside, at the time of shipment from the slot machine 1 or the like). After the RAM, etc.) is started in the initialized state, the game state is not yet controlled inside the main control unit 41, and the non-internal display effect is displayed in the controlled non-internal. After the transition from the non-internal to the internal, the non-internal display may not be performed even if the non-internal transition is performed again. In such a configuration, it is not necessary to execute unnecessary internal suggestions after the situation where the game is played on the game store side is completed until the medal payout rate becomes appropriate.

Further, in this embodiment, although the configuration is such that the internal internal suggestion is performed by the effect mode controlled by the sub control unit 91, the main control unit 41 may be configured to perform the internal internal suggestion. As a configuration in which the main control unit 41 makes an internal suggestion, for example, when the main control unit 41 includes an LED display suggesting that it is non-internal or internal, and the LED display is non-internal. While controlling to the lighting state, it may be configured to suggest that the LED display has moved to the inside by controlling it to the lighting state when it is inside, or it may be lighting state when the LED display is inside. On the other hand, it may be configured to suggest that it has moved to the inside by controlling it to the off state when it is not inside. Further, in a configuration in which the main control unit 41 is provided with an LED display that suggests that it is inside or outside the inside, the LED display may be used as a display that makes suggestions other than the suggestion inside the inside (for example, a game assist). It may be configured to be used in combination with the display 12 and the like), or it may be provided as a dedicated display for only suggesting inside.

[Action effect 3]
As a conventional slot machine, there is a configuration in which the advantageous state is controlled to be advantageous to the player, and the advantageous state is terminated when the number of games controlled in the advantageous state reaches 1500 games, which is a limit value.

In a slot machine having such a configuration, the advantageous state ends when the number of games controlled in the advantageous state reaches the limit value, but the number of games controlled in the advantageous state does not reach the limit value for a short period of time. There may be favorable situations in between, and it is not possible to sufficiently prevent the situation from becoming excessively favorable.

On the other hand, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control unit 41 that can be controlled in an advantageous section advantageous for the player, and the main control unit 41 has the number of advantageous section games and the medal of the advantageous section in the advantageous section. It is possible to count and update the net increase in the number of medals, and the end condition 1 that is established when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment) in the advantageous section, or the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section. It is possible to end the advantageous section when any one of the end conditions 2 that is satisfied when the number of sheets exceeds the specified number (2388 sheets in this embodiment) is satisfied. Further, when the slot machine 1 reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section reaches the specified number. A sub-control unit that can execute a common advantageous section end notice that notifies that the end condition of the advantageous section is near to be satisfied in any case when the previous second predetermined value (2089 sheets in this embodiment) is reached. The sub-control unit 91 includes 91, and in the common advantageous section end notice, the information regarding the end condition 1 is the number of remaining games up to the upper limit of the number of advantageous section games, and the information regarding the end condition 2 is the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section. The configuration is such that both the remaining number of sheets up to the maximum number of sheets are included in the notification.

According to this configuration, the end condition 1 is established when the number of advantageous section games updated in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, or the net increase in the number of medals updated in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. Even if one of the end conditions 2 is not satisfied, the advantageous section ends when the other is satisfied, so that it is possible to prevent excessive advantage by being controlled by the advantageous section. Further, it is advantageous in both cases when the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value before reaching the upper limit game number and the net increase number of medals reaches the second predetermined value before reaching the specified number. Since the common advantageous section end notice for notifying that the end condition of the section is about to be satisfied is executed, it is possible to notify in advance that the advantageous section will be completed, and the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous section can be notified in advance. Is established, and it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from suddenly ending. At this time, since the common advantageous section end notice includes both the information regarding the end condition 1 and the information regarding the end condition 2, even if it is a common advantageous section end notice, either the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is included. It is possible to recognize in advance that the advantageous section ends when the above is established.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 satisfies the end condition 1 of the advantageous section when the number of games controlled in the advantageous section (the number of advantageous section games) reaches the upper limit number of games (first specified value). It is configured to end the advantageous section by determining that the advantage section has been completed, but when the number of advantageous section games is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games (first specified value), it is determined that the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is satisfied. It may be configured to end the advantageous section, or when the number of advantageous section games exceeds the value (first specified value-1) immediately before reaching the upper limit number of games (first specified value), the end condition 1 of the advantageous section 1 It may be configured to end the advantageous section by determining that is satisfied. Further, the main control unit 41 determines that the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number (second specified value), and terminates the advantageous section. However, the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied when the net increase in the number of sheets in the advantageous zone reaches one more than the specified number (second specified value + 1) or when the number of sheets is one or more more than the specified number. It may be configured to end the advantageous section by determining that it has been done.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 has a configuration in which the notice of the end of the advantageous section is started when the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment), and the advantageous section is started. The configuration is such that the notice of the end of the advantageous section is executed when the number of games exceeds the first predetermined value, but it is advantageous when the number of advantageous section games exceeds the value (1399 games) immediately before reaching the first predetermined value. It may be configured to execute the section end notice. Further, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to execute the notice of the end of the advantageous section when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value (2088 in this embodiment). The configuration may be such that the advantageous section end notice is executed when the number of sheets becomes the second predetermined value or more, or the advantageous section end notice may be executed when the net increase number of sheets in the advantageous section reaches the second predetermined value + 1. ..

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control unit 41 that can be controlled in an advantageous section advantageous for the player, and the main control unit 41 counts the number of advantageous section games and the net increase in medals in the advantageous section in the advantageous section. The end condition 1 that is established when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment), or the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is the specified number (this). In the embodiment, the advantageous section is terminated when any one of the termination conditions 2 satisfied by exceeding 2388 sheets) is satisfied.

According to this configuration, it is advantageous that the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, or the net increase number of medals increased during the advantageous section exceeds the specified number and reaches the specified number + 1 or more. Since the section ends, it is possible to prevent it from becoming excessively advantageous rather than being controlled by the advantageous section.

When the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment determines the number of net medals in the advantageous section. When the second predetermined value (2089 sheets in this embodiment) is reached before reaching, it is possible to execute a common advantageous section end notice notifying that the end condition of the advantageous section is near to be satisfied. The notice of the end of the advantageous section is the difference in the number of games in the advantageous section until the end condition 1 is satisfied, that is, the number of remaining games up to the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section, and the net increase in the number of medals until the end condition 2 is satisfied. The difference between the two, that is, the number of games remaining up to the specified number of net medals is recognized, and the number of games in the advantageous section and the number of games in the advantageous section until the end condition 1 is satisfied each time the net increase in medals is updated. The difference between the above and the difference in the net increase in the number of medals until the end condition 2 is satisfied are updated.

According to this configuration, the remaining number of advantageous section games until the end condition 1 is satisfied and the remaining number of medals net increase until the end condition 2 is satisfied are recognized in real time each time the remaining value changes. Can be done.

When the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment determines the number of net medals in the advantageous section. When the second predetermined value (2089 sheets in this embodiment) is reached before reaching, it is possible to execute a common advantageous section end notice notifying that the end condition of the advantageous section is near to be satisfied. The notice of the end of the advantageous section is a configuration, and the upper limit number of games of the number of advantageous section games when the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is satisfied (1500 games in this embodiment) and the end condition 2 of the advantageous section are satisfied. By notifying the specified number of medals net increase in the number of medals to be identifiable, and starting from the time when the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value or when the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value. , It is configured to notify that the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is near or the end condition 2 is near.

According to this configuration, the player is made to recognize the upper limit of the number of advantageous section games related to the end condition 1 of the advantageous section and the specified number of medals net increase in the advantageous section related to the end condition 2 of the advantageous section. At the same time, it is possible to make the player recognize that the end condition 1 is about to be satisfied or the end condition 2 is about to be satisfied.

In the notice of the end of the advantageous section of this embodiment, the maximum number of games in the advantageous section when the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is satisfied and the specified number of net medals when the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied are specified. Although it is configured to notify so that it can be specified, the specified number of games in the advantageous section when the end condition 1 is satisfied (the number of games smaller than the maximum number of games) and the upper limit of the net increase in the number of medals when the end condition 2 is satisfied. It may be configured to notify the number of sheets so that they can be specified. In such a configuration, the player is made to recognize the specified number of games in the advantageous section related to the end condition 1 of the advantageous section and the upper limit of the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section related to the end condition 2 of the advantageous section. At the same time, it is possible to make the player recognize that the end condition 1 is close to be satisfied or the end condition 2 is close to be satisfied.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment defines the end condition 1 that is established when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment) in the advantageous section, or the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section. When any one of the end conditions 2 that is satisfied by exceeding the number of sheets (2388 sheets in this embodiment) is satisfied, the advantageous section can be terminated, and the sub-control unit 91 can use the advantageous section game. When the number reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before reaching the upper limit number of games, the second predetermined value (in this embodiment) before the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section reaches the specified number. Then, whenever the number of sheets reaches 2089), a common advantageous section end notice for notifying that the end condition of the advantageous section is about to be satisfied can be executed, and the main control unit 41 can execute the common advantageous section end notice in the advantageous section. As the end condition 3 that can be satisfied before the end condition 1 and the end condition 2 are satisfied, a predetermined arbitrary condition (in this embodiment, the gaming state controlled in the game is non-internal). Is established, it is possible to end the advantageous section, and whether the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before reaching the upper limit number of games, or a medal. When the net increase number exceeds the second predetermined value (2088 sheets in this embodiment) before the specified number of sheets is exceeded, the end condition 3 is not satisfied until the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied.

According to this configuration, the end condition 1 is set after the advance notice of the end of the advantageous section is executed because the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value or the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the second predetermined value. Since the advantageous section continues until the condition 2 is satisfied or the end condition 2 is satisfied, the player can be relieved.

[Action effect 4]
As a conventional slot machine, it controls to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player until the number of remaining games becomes 0, and when a specific state is reached during the advantageous state, "HOLD" is displayed in the vicinity of the number of remaining games, and the number of remaining games. Some configurations stop updating.

There is room for improvement in configurations that can stop the update of the remaining amount in an advantageous state, such as a slot machine having such a configuration.

On the other hand, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment controls the AT state to be advantageous to the player, and the number of navigation games is reduced by winning the navigation target combination in the internal lottery in the AT state. It is possible to perform processing, and the AT state is terminated when the remaining number of the navigation games becomes 0, and the number of navigation games even if the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery in the AT state. It is a configuration that can perform hold control for controlling to a hold state that does not decrease, and the hold state includes a first hold state and a second hold state.

According to this configuration, the remaining number of navigation games decreases due to the fact that the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery as a predetermined event, and the AT ends when the remaining number of navigation games becomes 0. In the state, it may be controlled to a hold state in which the remaining number of navigation games does not decrease even if a predetermined event occurs in the AT state, and there are a plurality of types of holds including a first hold state and a second hold state. Since it is controlled by the state, it is possible to enhance the interest associated with being controlled by the hold state.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 subtracts a predetermined number from the predetermined counter (number of navigation games) when a predetermined event occurs in the AT state (the navigation target combination is won by the internal lottery). Then, when the value of the predetermined counter after subtraction becomes 0, the AT state is controlled to end, but the predetermined event occurs in the AT state (for example, navigation by internal lottery). By winning the target combination), a predetermined number is added to the predetermined counter so that the difference between the value of the predetermined counter (for example, the counter that counts the number of times the navigation notification is performed) and the specified value is reduced. The AT state may be controlled to end when the value of the predetermined counter becomes the default value.

Further, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to control so that the subtraction process for subtracting the value of the navigation game number counter is not performed in each game in the hold state, that is, the remaining number of navigation games in the hold state. Although the number is not updated, the main control unit 41 performs a subtraction process for subtracting the value of the navigation game number counter in the hold state, and the remaining number of navigation games is equivalent to the period for controlling the hold state. It may be configured to control so that the remaining number of navigation games does not decrease by increasing the number.

Further, in the present embodiment, the AT state, which is an advantageous state for the player, ends when the remaining number of navigation games, which is an advantageous amount suggesting the amount of control that is advantageous for the player, becomes 0. The configuration to be performed, that is, the advantageous state is a configuration in which the operation is terminated when the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is exhausted, whereas the advantageous state is the configuration in which a predetermined termination condition is satisfied after the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is exhausted. It may be a configuration to be terminated. As a configuration to be terminated when a predetermined end condition is satisfied after the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is exhausted, for example, a specific symbol combination is stopped on the reel or a predetermined number of games is performed as the predetermined end condition. That, the fact that a specific combination is won by an internal lottery, etc. may be applied.

For example, in a configuration in which a specific symbol combination is stopped on a reel as a predetermined end condition, for example, there are an advantageous first state which is an advantageous state and a second state which is more disadvantageous than the advantageous gaming state. However, in the first state, the specific symbol combination is terminated when the specific symbol combination is stopped on the reel, and the process is shifted to the second state. In the first state, the specific symbol combination is stopped until the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is exhausted. By configuring the specific operation mode to be notified by the navigation notification, the specific operation mode is not performed because the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is exhausted when the first state is controlled. It is possible to prevent the specific symbol combination from stopping by performing the operation in the specific operation mode by itself, and the control is performed in the first state until the specific symbol combination is stopped. Then, in the period controlled to the first state, even after the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is exhausted, the navigation notification suggesting the operation mode in which the increasing combination can be won at the time of winning the push order small combination is performed. It may be controlled as follows. In such a configuration, since the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is eliminated, the timing at which the advantageous control is terminated and the timing at which the first state, which is the advantageous state, is terminated are different. In such a configuration, the sub-control unit 91 is used when the sub-control unit 91 is controlled to the first state until the first state is terminated even after it is specified that the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is exhausted. By performing the effect on the liquid crystal display 51 using the background image of the above, the expectation that the first state can be continued even after it is specified that the remaining amount of the advantageous amount has disappeared is maintained. Can be done.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control unit 41 that controls an advantageous section that can be controlled in the AT state, and the main control unit 41 has the number of advantageous section games and the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section in the advantageous section. Is possible, and the end condition 1 that is established when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment), or the specified number of medals net increase (2388 in this embodiment). It is a configuration that controls to end the advantageous section when any one of the end conditions 2 that is satisfied by exceeding the above is satisfied, and is the first predetermined value before the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games. When (1400 games) is reached, when the net increase in medals reaches the second predetermined value (2089) before reaching the specified number, a common advance notification that the end condition is near is reached. Notification (notice of the end of the advantageous section) can be executed, and advance notification includes information on the end condition 1 (the number of remaining games up to the upper limit of the number of advantageous section games) and information on the end condition 2 (up to the specified number of net increase numbers). It is a configuration that includes both of the remaining number of sheets).

According to this configuration, the end condition 1 is established when the number of advantageous section games updated in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, or the end is established when the net increase in medals updated in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. Even if one of the conditions 2 is not satisfied, the advantageous section ends when the other is satisfied, so that it is possible to prevent excessive advantage by being controlled by the advantageous section. In addition, when the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value before reaching the maximum number of games, or when the net increase in medals reaches the second predetermined value before exceeding the specified number, the end condition is set. Since the common advance notification notifying that the establishment is near is executed, it is possible to prevent the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 from being satisfied and the advantageous section suddenly ending. At this time, since the common advance notification includes both the information regarding the end condition 1 and the information regarding the end condition 2, either the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied even in the common advance notification. This makes it possible to recognize in advance that the advantageous section will end.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 satisfies the end condition 1 of the advantageous section when the number of games controlled in the advantageous section (the number of advantageous section games) reaches the upper limit number of games (first specified value). It is configured to end the advantageous section by determining that the advantage section has been completed, but when the number of advantageous section games is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games (first specified value), it is determined that the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is satisfied. It may be configured to end the advantageous section, or when the number of advantageous section games exceeds the value (first specified value-1) immediately before reaching the upper limit number of games (first specified value), the end condition 1 of the advantageous section 1 It may be configured to end the advantageous section by determining that is satisfied. Further, the main control unit 41 determines that the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number (second specified value), and terminates the advantageous section. However, the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied when the net increase in the number of sheets in the advantageous zone reaches one more than the specified number (second specified value + 1) or when the number of sheets is one or more more than the specified number. It may be configured to end the advantageous section by determining that it has been done.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 has a configuration in which the notice of the end of the advantageous section is started when the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment), and the advantageous section is started. The configuration is such that the notice of the end of the advantageous section is executed when the number of games exceeds the first predetermined value, but it is advantageous when the number of advantageous section games exceeds the value (1399 games) immediately before reaching the first predetermined value. It may be configured to execute the section end notice. Further, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to execute the notice of the end of the advantageous section when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value (2088 in this embodiment). The configuration may be such that the advantageous section end notice is executed when the number of sheets becomes the second predetermined value or more, or the advantageous section end notice may be executed when the net increase number of sheets in the advantageous section reaches the second predetermined value + 1. ..

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a configuration capable of performing hold control for controlling to a hold state in which the number of navigation games is not reduced even if the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery in the AT state. Is a configuration including a first hold state and a second hold state, and the first hold state is a state in which the remaining number of navigation games does not decrease and the remaining number of navigation games does not increase. The second hold state is a state in which the remaining number of navigation games does not decrease and the remaining number of navigation games may be added and can be increased.

According to this configuration, not only the remaining number of navigation games does not decrease but also can increase in the second hold state, so that the interest of having the first hold state and the second hold state can be further enhanced. ..

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a configuration capable of performing hold control for controlling to a hold state in which the number of navigation games is not reduced even if the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery in the AT state. Is a configuration including a first hold state and a second hold state, and the first hold state is a state in which the remaining number of navigation games does not decrease and the remaining number of navigation games does not increase. The second hold state is a state in which the remaining number of navigation games does not decrease and the remaining number of navigation games may be added and can be increased, and the second hold state is an internal lottery. When the navigation target role is won, the remaining number of navigation games can be increased.

According to this configuration, in the second hold state, the number of navigation games is increased by the occurrence of a predetermined event (winning of the navigation target combination) in which the remaining number of navigation games is reduced if the hold state is not controlled. Since the remaining number can be increased, it is possible to further enhance the interest by being controlled to the second hold state.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment can display a remaining navigation game number suggestion image displaying the remaining number of navigation games in the AT state on the liquid crystal display 51, and the navigation game can be displayed by subtracting the number of navigation games. When the remaining number of the number decreases, the remaining navigation game number suggestion image is also updated so that the remaining number of the displayed navigation game number decreases, and the hold suggesting that the hold state is controlled. It is possible to perform an effect, and the hold effect is a first hold effect that suggests that the hold state is controlled in the first hold state, and a second that suggests that the hold state is controlled in the second hold state. The number of remaining navigation games is suggested regardless of whether the first hold effect is controlled to the hold state or the second hold effect is controlled to the hold state, including the two-hold effect. It is a configuration that reduces the visibility of the remaining number of navigation games displayed by the image.

According to this configuration, in the hold state, it is intuitive that the remaining number of navigation games does not decrease by reducing the visibility of the remaining number of navigation games displayed by the image suggesting the number of remaining navigation games. It can be recognized, and even if it suggests that it is controlled to the hold state in the first hold state or it suggests that it is controlled to the hold state in the second hold state, the remaining navigation game number suggestion image is used. Since the visibility of the remaining number of displayed navigation games is reduced, it is possible to clearly notify that the remaining number of navigation games does not decrease regardless of which hold state is controlled.

In this embodiment, in the first hold effect and the second hold effect, the strong hold image or the weak hold image is superimposed on the remaining navigation game number suggestion image on the liquid crystal display 51, and the remaining navigation game number suggestion image is used. By covering the remaining number of displayed navigation games with a strong hold image or a weak hold image to make it invisible, the visibility of the remaining number of navigation games is reduced. In the 2-hold effect, even with a configuration that reduces the visibility of the remaining number of navigation games by reducing the color of the remaining number of navigation games displayed by the image suggesting the number of remaining navigation games and lowering the transparency. It is good, and in the first hold effect and the second hold effect, the visibility of the remaining number of navigation games is lowered by deleting the display of the remaining number of navigation games displayed by the image suggesting the number of remaining navigation games. It may be configured.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can display the remaining number of navigation games suggestion image displaying the remaining number of navigation games in the AT state on the liquid crystal display 51, and the navigation game can be displayed by subtracting the number of navigation games. When the remaining number of the number decreases, the remaining navigation game number suggestion image is also updated so that the remaining number of the displayed navigation game number decreases, and the hold suggesting that the hold state is controlled. It is possible to perform an effect, and the hold effect is a first hold effect that suggests that the hold state is controlled in the first hold state, and a second that suggests that the hold state is controlled in the second hold state. The first hold effect, including the two-hold effect, reduces the visibility of the remaining number of navigation games displayed by the image suggesting the number of remaining navigation games over the period controlled by the first hold state, and the second hold effect. Is a configuration that reduces the visibility of the remaining number of navigation games displayed by the image suggesting the number of remaining navigation games over the period controlled by the second hold state.

According to this configuration, regardless of which hold state is controlled, the visibility of the remaining number of navigation games is reduced by the corresponding hold effect during that period, so that the remaining number of navigation games remains over the period. It is possible to notify that the number does not decrease.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can perform hold control to control the number of navigation games so as not to decrease the number of navigation games even if the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery in the AT state, and the hold state is the first. The configuration includes a 1-hold state and a second hold state, and the control content regarding the AT controlled by the main control unit 41 is common even after the end of the first hold state and the end of the second hold state. It is a configuration that shifts to the non-hold state (normal AT state).

According to this configuration, both when controlled to the first hold state and when controlled to the second hold state, the state shifts to the common non-hold state after the end, so that the hold state has ended. Can be recognized in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can perform hold control to control the hold state so that the number of navigation games is not reduced even if the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery in the AT state. , The first hold state and the second hold state are included, and the effect mode controlled by the sub control unit 91 is common even after the end of the first hold state and the end of the second hold state. It is a configuration that shifts to AT production (normal).

According to this configuration, both when controlled to the first hold state and when controlled to the second hold state, the state shifts to the common AT effect (normal) after the end, so that the hold state ends. You can easily recognize what you have done.

In this embodiment, the non-hold state (normal AT state) and the non-hold state (normal AT state) in which the control contents related to the AT controlled by the main control unit 41 are common even after the end of the first hold state and the end of the second hold state. It is a configuration that shifts to the AT effect (normal) in which the effect mode controlled by the sub control unit 91 is common, and is advantageous control for the player even after the end of the first hold state and the end of the second hold state. The configuration is such that the contents shift to a common state and the effect mode shifts to a common state, but the control contents advantageous to the player are common even after the end of the first hold state and the end of the second hold state. , Or a configuration in which the effect mode shifts to at least one of the common states may be used.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can perform hold control to control the number of navigation games so as not to decrease the number of navigation games even if the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery in the AT state, and the hold state is the first. It has a configuration including one hold state and a second hold state, and includes a liquid crystal display 51, and is common to the liquid crystal display 51 both after the end of the first hold state and after the end of the second hold state. It is a configuration for displaying the background image A of the effect (normal).

According to this configuration, the background image A of the common AT effect (normal) is displayed regardless of whether the control is performed in the first hold state or the second hold state, so that the hold state can be changed. It is possible to make it easier to understand that it has ended.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can be controlled in an advantageous section that can be controlled to the AT state, and has an advantageous section game number counter that counts the number of games controlled in the advantageous section (the number of advantageous section games). It is equipped with a net increase counter that counts the net increase in the number of medals increased in the advantageous section, and even if the remaining number of navigation games is 1 or more, the number of advantageous section games counted by the advantageous section game number counter is the maximum number of games. The AT state is terminated even when either the end condition 1 that is satisfied when the number reaches or the end condition 2 that is satisfied when the net increase in the number of medals counted by the net increase counter exceeds the specified number. The advantageous section game number counter counts the number of advantageous section games even in the hold state, and the net increase number counter counts the increased number of medals net increase in the advantageous section even in the hold state.

According to this configuration, the AT state ends when the maximum number of games is reached from the start of the advantageous section, and even if the maximum number of games is not reached, the net increase in the number of medals increased in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. Since the AT state ends, it is possible to prevent the advantage from increasing excessively, and even when the game is controlled to the hold state, the number of games controlled in the advantageous section is counted and the net increase in medals increased in the advantageous section. Since the number of sheets is counted, it is possible to prevent the advantage from being excessively increased even if the number of sheets is controlled to the hold state.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can perform hold control to control the number of navigation games to a hold state in which the number of navigation games is not reduced even if the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery in the AT state. It is a configuration including a 1-hold state and a 2nd hold state, and can be controlled to an additional state in which an additional number of navigation games can be given as a privilege advantageous to the player in the 1st hold state and the 2nd hold state. It is a configuration that can perform a privilege grant suggestion effect that suggests sex.

According to this configuration, it can be expected that the privilege is given by being controlled to the first hold state and the second hold state.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to be capable of performing the privilege grant suggestion effect in the first hold state and the second hold state, but at least in the first hold state and the second hold state. It may be configured so that the privilege grant suggestion effect can be performed in one of the states.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can perform hold control to control the number of navigation games to a hold state that does not reduce the number of navigation games even if the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery in the AT state, and the hold state is the first. Controlled to the second hold state when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes the specific small winning combination 1 or the specific small winning combination 2 in the AT state (non-holding state) including the 1-hold state and the 2nd hold state. It is a configuration to perform an additional state transition lottery to decide whether or not to do it, and in the first hold state, the additional number of navigation games is not given as a privilege, and in the second hold state, the additional number of navigation games is given as a privilege. In the hold control, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes the specific small winning combination 1 or the specific small winning combination 2, and it is determined to control to the second hold state, the hold control is controlled to the second hold state. When the lottery result of the internal lottery is the specific small winning combination 1 or the specific small winning combination 2 and it is not determined to control the second hold state, the control is performed in the first hold state. Further, in the first hold state and the second hold state, it is possible to perform a privilege grant suggestion effect suggesting the possibility of being controlled to an additional state in which an additional number of navigation games can be granted as an advantageous privilege for the player. The privilege grant suggestion effect is a configuration that suggests the possibility that the privilege is granted even in the first hold state.

According to this configuration, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes the specific small winning combination 1 or the specific small winning combination 2, and it is suggested that it may be controlled to the second hold state in which the privilege can be granted, the first hold state is set. Even if it is controlled, it is suggested that the privilege may be given by the privilege grant suggestion effect during that time, so that the expectation that the privilege is given can be increased even in such a case.

Further, for example, the main control unit 41 can perform hold control for controlling to a hold state in which the number of navigation games is not reduced even if the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery in the AT state, and the first hold state can be performed. In a configuration that can be controlled to a hold state including the second hold state, the first hold state is set as a precursor state suggesting the possibility of being controlled to the second hold state, and the second hold state is added to the number of navigation games. As a possible additional state, a state lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the second hold state at a predetermined opportunity (for example, winning of a specific combination), and the first hold state is set regardless of the lottery result of the lottery. If it is controlled and the state lottery is won, the configuration may be such that the first hold state is followed by the second hold state. In such a configuration, by being controlled to the first hold state, it can be expected to be controlled to the second hold state (additional state).

Further, in the configuration that can be controlled to the second hold state following the first hold state, in the first hold state, a privilege grant suggestion effect suggesting the possibility of being controlled to the additional state as a privilege advantageous to the player is performed. It is preferable to have a configuration in which the privilege is obtained, and in such a configuration, when the first hold state is controlled, it is suggested that the privilege may be granted by the privilege grant suggestion effect during that time, so that the privilege is given. It is possible to raise the expectation that it will be granted.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to the present invention and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine in which the bet number is set by using medals and credits as the game value has been described, but the slot in which the bet number is set by using the game ball as the game value has been described. It may be applied to machines or fully credited slot machines that set the number of bets using only credits as game value. When the game ball is used as the game value, for example, one medal can be associated with five game balls, and when the bet number is set to 3 in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. Corresponds to setting the number of bets using.

Further, the value is not limited to one using only one of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and for example, a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls can be used together. It may be. That is, it is possible to set the number of bets and play a game by using any of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and a plurality of types of games such as medals and game balls are generated depending on the occurrence of a prize. A slot machine that can pay out any value may be applied.

Further, in the above-mentioned Examples and Modifications, an example in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a gaming ball is launched into a gaming area. It can also be applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that plays a game by doing so.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 Start switch 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 12 Game auxiliary display 12a Advantageous section notification LED
41 Main control unit 91 Sub control unit

Claims (1)

Equipped with a variable display unit that can variablely display multiple types of identification information that can be identified by each.
In a slot machine in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
An advantageous state control means for controlling an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
A remaining amount reducing means capable of reducing the remaining amount of the advantageous amount by the occurrence of a predetermined event in the advantageous state,
An advantageous state ending means for terminating the advantageous state when the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is exhausted,
A hold state control means for controlling a hold state in which the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is not reduced by the remaining amount reducing means even if a predetermined event occurs in the advantageous state.
A remaining amount increase determining means for determining whether or not to increase the remaining amount of the advantageous amount in the advantageous state,
When the remaining amount increasing determining means determines that the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is to be increased, the remaining amount increasing means for increasing the remaining amount of the advantageous amount and the remaining amount increasing means.
Equipped with
In the hold state, the remaining amount increasing means does not reduce the remaining amount of the advantageous amount, and the remaining amount increasing determining means determines that the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is increased. In the first hold state in which the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is not increased, the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is not reduced by the remaining amount reducing means , and the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is not reduced by the remaining amount increasing determining means. The second hold state, in which the remaining amount of the advantageous amount may be increased by the remaining amount increasing means , is included.
In the second hold state, it is possible to execute a privilege suggestion effect suggesting that a privilege related to an increase in the remaining amount of the advantageous amount may be given.
Even in the first hold state, the privilege suggestion effect can be executed.
A slot machine that shifts to a common state after the end of the first hold state and after the end of the second hold state.

Images